Home

Denon POA-A1HDCI User's Manual

1. IIT I WESI Ina Wa 2 11 imi W 2721 Hrs Wa 2711 E Wes 2710 m RCA XLR r 0FF RCA XLR OFF AMP BRIDGE NORMAL Bi AMP MOVINERtED HOT A eren NON I INVERTED COLD fopton TRIGGER IN RS232C DC12V STRAIGHT CABLE Surround Surround speaker Front Surround Center Surround Surround Surround Front speaker speaker speaker back speaker speaker Speaker L B R speaker speaker A L B L L R 11 L1 Connecting the XLR pre out terminal Example 9 3 channels Subwoofer 3 Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer with built in amplifier X L Left Right AVP A1HDCI ANTENNA i 22 IN OPTICAL
2. ASSIGN m 5 1 OY 1 JW Wa qu 1 2 1 0 0 7 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 VCR 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 VCRJZONE4 ZONE 2 HD Radio lt x moy A 5 Te oP US viuru 2 NONANVERTING HOT 4 INVERTING COLD SAT 1 2 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE m SW EE NN SM Z 5 5 VIDEO 9006 1 GROUND Ceo HL E HE Ea 2 ING HOT hs A ClO RCA RCA RCA XLR r 0FF XLR OFF XLR OFF RCA RCA XLR OFF XLR OFF T I Wu D L BRIDGE Bi AMP BRIDGE Bi B P L BRIDGE BRIDGE 1 AL N L NORMAL AL AP OFF NON INVERTED HOT eot EXTERNAL INvERTED COLD OPTION Z i ZR a 5 e C 9 epee Ne N AAI TRIGGER IN RS232C DC12V STRAIGHT CABLE
3. 81 While the multi zone indicator is light press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to be operated The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off 2 Select the remote ID to be set DTo set to 1 Press REPEAT The M indicator flashes 2To set to 2 Press RANDOM The Z2 indicator flashes 3 To set to 3 Press USB The Z3 indicator flashes To set to 4 Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES The Z4 indicator flashes While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator turns off When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVP A1HDCI s IGS page 41 Resetting the Settings While pressing ZONE OFF press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen All the multi zone indicators flash 4 times then all the settings are restored to their defaults Multi Zone Connections and Operations Multi Zone Connections e For ZONE2 it is necessary to set in sequence with the signal connected to either the power amplifier or bit stream amps The amp should be the power amplifier in the case of ZONES and the bit stream for ZONEA e f the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog change to PCM 2 channel signal and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video
4. e When recording to a VCR it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment NOTE be the same type that is connected to the AVP A1HDCI VCR OUT connector Example TV IN gt S Video cable VCR OUT gt S Video cable Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP A1HDCI s OPTICAL4 output connector TV IN gt Video cable VCR OUT Video cable to any input connector other than OPTICAL4 e When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select VCR Assign Component 187 page 47 Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP A1HDCI s OPTICAL4 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL4 17 Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and outputs and be sure to interconnect correctly Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector Multi channel playback is possible with DVD Audio discs Super Audio CD etc DVD player AUDIO DENON LINK DVD 2 3 SAT 4 VCR N EE COAXIAL 9e0eD z 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 0 COMPONENT zr LE e 4B EE os DVR eel 0600000 PHONO IN pvp HDP TV CBL SAT VCR Pod DVR 1 DVR 2 0000000 AUDIO 000 RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE AUDIO
5. 5 2 Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar THX types or dipolar types provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker monopolar Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position mounted above ear level Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position Surround back speaker Surround speaker Front speaker E Pd 2 to 3 feet a 60 to 90 cm Point slightly downwards Surround back speakers As seen from the side As seen from above 3 When playing movies and music To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music we suggest that during setup choose Dolby Digital DTS with THX and Surround Speakers A the bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position Choose Dolby Digital DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the listening room Then by simply activating the THX function used during movie playback the Surround A speakers are automatically activated For multi channel music listening Dolby Digital or DTS music programs turn off the THX enhancements by touching the THX button on the remote control and the Surround B speakers will be automatically activated
6. CD Owner s manual 2 Warranty for North America model only 3 Service station list 4 Power cord Cord length Approx 5 ft 1 5 m 5 Main remote control RC 1067 6 LR6 AA batteries for RC 1067 D Sub remote control RC 1070 RO3 AAA batteries for RC 1070 9 FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna small for AM broadcasts 1 AM loop antenna large for HD Radio broadcasts 12 Dipole antenna for HD Radio broadcasts 13 Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection Setup microphone Cord length Approx 7 6 m Cautions on Handling e Before turning the power switch on Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet About condensation If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings condensation dew may form on the operating parts inside the unit causing the unit not to operate properly If this happens let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit Cautions on using mobile phones Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise If so move the mobile phone away from this
7. Front Center Surround Surround Surround speaker R speaker speaker back speaker back speaker speaker speaker L A L B L R L The default AVP A1HDCI balance model XLR pre out terminal pin alignment is as shown OO D GROUND 2 HOT 3 COLD Operations MM Connecting Equipment with HDMI Connect AVP A1HDCI and POA A1HDCI with the connectors Compatible audio Discs format examples control link cable channel linear PCM 29 32 192 kHz CD DVD Video The control link cable is included with the POA A1HDCI With HDMI connections the video and audio signals can be transferred 16 20 24 bits DVD Audio X AVP ATHDCI can be connected and control to up to 2 POA With a single cable Mukcehannel linear geh 3292 kus A1HDCI units DVD 16 20 24 bi DVD Audio Monitor Its Refer to the POA A1HDCI user s manual for how to connect player om Dolby Digital DTS DVD Video n 2 5 d6h DSD 2 8224 MHz SACD 1 bit HDMI OUT Set the POA AIHDCTSs control selector switch to A Set the POA AIHDCI s mode select switch according suonoeuuo to the number of POA AIHDCI units you are l PIUS HD DVD Dolby TrueHD Bitstream connecting DTS HD Blu ray Disc When connecting 1 unit 1 Copyright protection system HDCP In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD Video or When connecting 2
8. 5 Input signals WMA DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD Windows Note ids Media Audio DTS ES DTS ES DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD Surround mode ANALOG PCM DTS DTS WAV DSCRT MTRX 5 1ch 96 24 DIGITAL EX DIGITAL EX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio MPEG 4 With Flag With Flag With Flag With no Flag 5 1 5 4ch multi ch AAC FLAC PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT DSD PURE DIRECT DSD MULTI PURE MULTI CH PURE DIRECT M PURE D PLIIx CINEMA 1 M PURE D PLIIx MUSIC oA MCh PURE DIRECT 71 DSP SIMULATION WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO VIDEO GAME MATRIX umm O x x x x x x pa xX E ES gt i pa xX gt ES 8 xX Be gt 8 ya xX Ba xX ba x 8 Da xX ES x 8 23 xX ES ES gt 8 S xX ba gt 85 ba xX ES 8 pa xX ES 8 23 X ES X lt ES gt ba O E S PG x 8 S maxX ES xXx OR OR OF EI OB OR OM OR Om OR OR OR OM OF OR EI OB OR OR OR Oq OR OR OR OR OE Om O ES OR e e O O O O O O O O 9 3 NOTE Mode selectable in initial status S 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None
9. C NET DTU DEV 1 mode m G MEMO AV lt I gt SEARCH Se ENTER NET USB AMP mode Main remote control unit REPEAT d Sub remote control unit RANDOM About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Basic Operation 1 Make the necessary preparations D Check the network environment then turn on the AVP A1HDCI s power I page 21 Network Audio 2 If settings are required make the network settings e page 35 37 Network Setup 3 Prepare the computer I Computer s operating instructions Install Windows Media Player ver 11 Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press NET USB AMP mode to select NET USB GUI Source Select NET USB Play GP page 44 To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the NET DTU bEv1 mode Iz amp page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations Use A V to select the menu then press ENTER or gt to select the file you want to play 5 Press ENTER or D Playback starts Playing repeatedly Press REPEAT on the sub remote control unit Selectable items All One GUI Source Select NET USB Playback Mode Repeat 1257 page 47 Playing in random order Press RANDOM on t
10. S ZONE indicators eee 81 Advanced setup button 81 Input source select buttons 43 CHANNEL buttons ses 62 80 SHIFT 57 Q MENU 24 Cursor buttons 4 24 SEARCH button 58 60 63 Q REPEAT button 62 D RANDOM button 63 Remote control signal transmitter 4 D ZONE SELECT button eee 81 B Zone power on off buttons ZONE ON ZONE 83 D Master volume control buttons VOLUME nenene 56 B Muting button MUTE ee 56 83 D ENTER button Mel 24 D RETURN button e 24 D System buttons eee 57 79 80 D ALL MUSIC FAVORITES DIRECT PLAY button m 79 USB DIRECT PLAY 79 NOTE The AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 and OPTION buttons cannot be used Preparations Cables Used for Connections Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are Select the cables according to the equipment being connected described in these operating instructions Please select the types Audio cables Video cables of connection
11. SOURCE SELECT Surround mode 69 INPUT MODE yp lt ZONE2 3 4 PHONES REC SELECT gt E23 AMP URE _ D SL _ SIMU INPU SOURCE SELECT lt eee m m wd About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Surround mode Other Operations and Functions Other Operations Playing Super Audio CD Assign DENON LINK with the Digital setting or assign HDMI with the HDMI setting 1257 page 46 Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press SOURCE SELECT to select the input source assigned in step 1 The ENT or RUN indicator lights on the display 3 Select AUTO for the INPUT MODE tz page 45 Select the surround mode 1257 page 48 50 We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode Start playing the Super Audio CD The psp indicator lights on the display For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions e When playing 050 signals in the DIRECT PURE DIRECT mode the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals When playing in other surround modes the DSD signals are first converted into PCM format then into analog signals e DSD DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD 2 channel signa
12. nn 55 WONIROR eii Hike SUE ua II DUE VUE awa nn 55 Auto Surround eE 55 Ourck Select RR pa IRI Y ER EUR S mms 55 Preset Station oae rex er Qni is dare rax eh ERR e Eni he ker i endis 55 Playback Remote Control Unit Operations Preparations 56 Turning the PoWer O 2 2 ura ters sa eri pra E nin 56 Operations During Playback pa Re DN ETT Te 56 Playing Video and Audio Equipment UE 56 Basic Operation Te ee e MEE E 56 Listening to FM AM Broadcasts rr err en cnr es 57 Basic Operation rar 57 Presetting Radio Stations Preset 57 Listening to Preset STATIONS e n aa n ns 57 58 RDS Radio Data System 58 PBS Search 58 PTY IL LIU TT 58 59 HT Radio 59 Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs 59 60 Basic Operation Cr E M Mrd 60 Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID 60 Searching Categories uh tenn en ee Um tU ME ERN EET 60 Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly saa aR sS Peter a SINE US AUR 60 Listening to HD Radio Stations een 61 Basic Operation E Ms 61 Selecting Audio Programs M m uu ree CU ERREUR sea 62 Check the HD Radio Reception Information erie 62 iPod Playback
13. 18 Component with Multi channel Output connectors 18 USB Por s S E catia LLL TT 19 Xie E EE EE 19 n dq uus 20 Network Aulo sso ras rte USD E s 2 ELO eaa neon nione naa ecd DP External Controller ee eee ee e e 23 Connecting the Power Gord ooo rrr eet een 29 Once Connections are Completed dE E ee 23 GUI Menu Operations Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title 24 Example of Display Of Default Values mman 24 Examples of GUI Screen Displays EE EI CEPR 24 Browse Menu Top Menu due RCL 24 Example Menus with Illustrations Auto Setup 24 Cursor Position Display avec M ero ee s 24 Operations Ue RUE oe Pal GUI Menu Map T 25 Preparations er OTe Peer ETT Ed RR eR WR ME 26 Auto Setup nue MM EE 26 El Auto Setup mec a EM MU UP E 75927 Error Messages 28 Option PUE 28 Parameter CHECK rae esae n a ER D Manual Setup Speaker Setup e Ee T 29 El Speaker Configuration ee RE 29 Subwoofer Setup 29 Distance e 55 NUN EE E 30 El Channel Leve 30 Crossover Frequency Mere MM Eo Sua ee 30 31
14. PHONO 3 mae GOLD 00000 0000 2 RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE 2 NOM ING oN oy ae HOT Fe 00000 00000 0000 0000 1 2 TV CBL SAT VCR Pod DVR 1 00000 0000 1 RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE AUDIO e When using a coaxial digital cable BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at e When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI GUI menu Source Select IV CBL Assign Digital I page 46 menu Source Select SAT Assign Digital I page 46 e When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source e When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select IV CBL Assign Component I page 47 Select SAT Assign Component IG page 47 15 Connecting the Recording Components Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and outputs and be sure to interconnect correctly Digital Video Recorder Connect the cables to be used 2 5 5 5 o Digital video recorder e Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO signals VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO
15. z B OVE 13 Record Player CD Player Turntable MM cartridge LOOP COAX ANT 750 J TUNER FM zm UN YS mm ANTENNA T YT X Gy wasa IN 250mA MAX 1 DVD 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 Q mes S LINK BNC COAXIAL Ki DIGITAL EMO Ogee 2 1 DVD 2 T 000 v PB CB PR 75 Di PB CB S VIDEO 66600000 gt p En uu M HAAN on J fanann AUDIO e When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge use commercially available MC head amplifier or a step up transformer e Induction humming a booming sound may be produced from the speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected e With some record players noise may be generated when the ground wire is connected If so disconnect the ground wire The AVP A1HDCI s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise when a record player is connected This is not a safety ground terminal Connect the cables to be used CD player AUDIO AUDIO COAXIAL OUT XLR OUT L R BE NZ 3 SAT 4 CD 1 TV CBL 2 DVF Al m e Me l 1 DVD 2 H
16. lt fer Ba gt fer Ba E gt ES gt ERI Bee Be gt Ba ES gt EN X ES X ES X ES lt EM X EX X Bae X ES lt O EM x ES x ES x ES x X ES x ES x Be x ES x x x ES X E O ES II O ES O ES gt x ES x X E X ES X ES X ES X X X ES X ES X ES X O IBI x ES x ES x Be x X Ba X ES X ES X ES O ia x ES x ES x Be x X Ba X B X ES X ES X x ES x ES x x NOTE 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None 3 For input signals other than 2 channel signals this mode cannot be selected when surround back speaker is set to 1spkr or None Mode selectable in initial status Mode fixed when AFDM is ON Selectable mode Non selectable mode xooe 91 Surround mode STANDARD DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx CINEMA DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx CINEMA DOLBY PROCOGICIKMUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx GAME DOLBY PRO LOGIC II CINEMA DOLBY PRO LOGIC II MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC II GAME DOLBY PRO LOGIC DOLBY HEADPHONE neural MULTI CH IN MULTI IN PLIIx CINEMA MULTI IN PLIIx MUSIC MULTI CH IN 71 DIRECT DSD DIRECT DSD MULTI DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRE
17. 10 dB Center Image Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound Variable range 0 0 1 0 Panorama Assign front L R signal also to surround channels for wider sound Selectable items ON Dimension Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance E E Variable range 0 Center Width Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound 5 Delay Time Adjust delay time to control sound stage size Variable range Oms 300 ms Effect Switch effect signal for multi surround speakers on and off Selectable items OFF Effect Level Variable range 0 Adjust effect signal level Variable range 1 0 15 X Only when the surround mode is MONO Variable range 15 Set a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural Room Size Determine size of acoustic environment Selectable items Small Medium small Medium large Large NOTE Room Size does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played AFDM Auto select surround mode by source This function only works for software containing a special identification signal If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES it is played in 6 1 channels If not it is played in 5 1 channels Selectable items OFF Examp
18. Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully providing extremely high quality sound Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the PURE button on the main remote control unit e To cancel press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the PURE button on the main remote control unit e When in the PURE DIRECT mode the GUI screen is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off e f the HDMI input connector is selected video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode e The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode Parameter Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit Audio Adjust various audio parameters L OCK Parameter Surround Parameters Tone Room EQ El Dynamic EO RESTORER 1 Night Mode Audio Delay Surround Parameters Adjust Surround sound parameters The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes e page 89 90 Mode Select the mode according to the playback source LJ In the PLIIx or mode Selectable items Cinema Music Game Pro Logic In the DIS NEO 6 mode Selectable items Cinema Music The Music mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music 50 In the THX mode for 2 channel sources
19. When RECOUT mode is set to SOURCE with this amplifier signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder I page 70 DSP Simulation Playback The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 9 DENON original surround modes The surround parameters can be adjusted 57 89 90 to achieve an even more realistic powerful sound field Selectable items 7CH STEREO This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers WIDESCREEN This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of viewing a movie on a large screen SUPER STADIUM This mode is suited for viewing sports programs ROCK ARENA This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena JAZZ CLUB This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in a jazz club CLASSIC CONCERT This mode is for appreciating classical concert programs MONO u 2 This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound VIDE0 GAME This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games MATRIX This mode lets you add a sense of expansion to stereo music sources 1 Can also be set by pressing the 7CH STEREO button on the main unit However the GUI menu is not displayed 2 When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO mode the sound will be off balance with a single channel
20. eau 62 Basic Operation Taye EM 62 Listening TO MIS 62 63 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod 63 Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices or Rhapsody Topo he Me 63 64 Basic Operation vum te 65 Listening wO 66 Playing Files Stored ona Computer Pe reer 67 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices 67 68 Listening to Rhapsody s aa aysa A a Sua Saa Sa up MEE P 68 Operating the AVP A1HDCI Using a Browser Web control 68 Other Operations and Functions Other Operations mc Me ae Rte 69 Playing Super A dio 69 Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode 69 70 Convenient Functions 70 HDMI Control 70 71 Channel p gc cleSEISHCN A E 72 Ouk Select F nction eu UI EIER EE po Personal Memory Plus Function sss ess Fuss EET 0 0 ER S 72 Last Function Memory Eon Ne e I QUU SIRE asta Ran TS 72 Backup Memory 72 Resetting the Microprocessor rU MM MTM 72 Mam Remote Gontrol Unit 73 Operating DENON Audio Components m t S m 73 Presetting ee teat TE
21. SR SR SR HOT SL B B SL B SR B SR B Setting Free Assign allows you to freely assign each pre out to any channel depending on the environment used Selectable channels Selectable items Normal Free Assign FrontL FrontR Center SurroundAL SurroundAR Surround BL Surround BR Surround Back L Preout terminal Surround BackR Subwoofer1 Subwoofer2 Subwoofer 3 SR SL SR B oBL SBR SW1 SW2 SW3 Pre out Assign SRN 5008 SR Selectable teo PL FL FL FL Da TF a FR FR FR FR C C XLR INV SN DGROUND LEA SL A SL A SL A SL A SL A SL A 27 COLD A B B B S Free Assign SBR SBR SW Set when connecting the receiver to a POA A1HDCI SW2 so ses suo s POA LINK Set when connecting the receiver to a POA A1HDCI through a NIN lee 2 5 12 CONTROL LINK e Channels that are set up in the GUI menu Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration to None can be set up but will not generate output e Pre out terminals in ZONE2 and ZONES can not be allocated Selectable items ON Single Dual e One channel can be assigned to up to 4 pre out terminals 39 POA 1 POA 2 Set POA A1HDCI for which the MODE select switch is set to 1 or 2 a See the POA A1HDCI operating instructions L1 Input Selector Select the setup channel Selectable items L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4 L5
22. Selectable mode 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None X Non selectable mode 5 f the surround back speaker setup is set to None and when using headphones then 5CH STEREO is displayed 9CH STEREO is displayed when surround A B and the surround back speaker are used 93 About Networks Windows Media Player ver 11 This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player ver 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA DRM WMA MP3 and WAV vTuner This is a free online contents server for Internet radio Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs For inquiries about this service visit the site below vTuner website http AWwww radiodenon com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary DLNA e DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance e Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED products Windows Media DRM A copyright protected technology developed by Microsoft e Windows Vista the Windows logo are trademarks
23. 20041 20348 20352 20742 20081 20045 20067 21162 20278 20642 20278 20209 20278 20106 20348 20642 20041 20038 20046 20209 20278 20348 20037 20041 20240 20045 20000 20209 20278 20038 20480 21137 21237 20348 20000 20038 20162 20037 20081 21562 20000 20209 20106 21137 Luxor LXI M Electronic Magnadyne Magnasonic Magnavox Magnin Magnum Manesth Marantz Mark Marta Mastec Master s Matsul Matsushita Media Center PC Mediator Medion Memorex Metronic Metz MGA MGN Technology Micormay Micromaxx Microsoft Midland Migros Mind Minolta Mitsubishi Motorola MTC MTX Multitec Multitech Murphy Myryad NAD Naiko NAP Nationa 20048 20047 20104 20043 20046 20106 20315 20037 20000 20042 20067 20037 20240 20000 20038 20081 20037 20240 20000 20278 21278 20035 20037 20048 20039 20081 20240 20000 20226 20618 20642 21593 21781 20240 20642 20081 20045 20209 20035 20081 20209 20038 20000 20278 20037 20642 20278 20037 20240 20209 20278 20348 20352 20742 20035 20162 20081 20226 21162 21197 20081 20208 20348 20352 20642 20035 20035 20162 20037 20048 20038 20047 20240 20000 20104 20208 20278 20046 20348 20479 21162 21237 21262 20081 21062 20162 20037 20081 2
24. 60 20 D lt D x lt SOURCE SELECT gt lt STATUS gt 7 2 lt 0N STANDBY gt ENTER AVPD c NET DTU L amp B iPod DEv2 mode cem lt lt gt gt I IK YI las 1 7 4 1 18 BAND p POWER OFF ED ly ENTER AV TA AVE SEARCH CHANNEL DTU iPod AMP mode AMP mode Main remote control unit Bi 5 11 44 1905 L een REPEAT Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Listening to HD Radio Stations HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM AM broadcasts It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs Using the HD Radio Receiver HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services e FM sounds as sensational as CDs e AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo e A variety of data services including text based information song title artist name album name genre etc can be received Furthermore in addition to conventional broadcasts with HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs For detailed
25. 10180 10109 10009 10180 10054 1007705 10093 10037 10486 10712 10672 10218 11796 10047 10051 10060 10145 11147 10180 10218 11298 10037 10765 10767 10820 10817 10009 10180 10843 10264 10053 10817 10218 10082 11556 10000 10060 10001 10070 10092 10037 10370 10054 10030 10047 10037 10821 10145 11156 10009 10287 10037 10171 10000 10074 10180 10208 10487 10714 10054 10451 10702 10166 11347 10556 10009 10264 10783 10817 10821 11008 10092 10009 10036 10108 10451 10463 10030 10171 10035 10418 10499 10217 10218 10371 10714 10017 10060 10264 10370 11498 10009 10264 11170 10036 10037 10487 10180 10030 10163 10370 10053 10009 10370 10418 10606 10672 10715 11037 10154 10000 10093 10180 10178 10030 10037 10035 11982 Daewoo Dainichi Dansai Dantax Datsura Dawa Daytek Dayton Daytron Dayu De Graaf Decca Degraff Deitron Dell Denko Denon Denver Desmet Diamant Diamond Digatron Digiline Digital Life Digitex Digitor Digix Media Dixi DL Domeos Domland Dongda Donghai Dream Vision DSE DTS Dual Dual Tec Dumont Durabrand Dux Dwin Dynatech Dynatron 10154 10030 10661 10865 11756 10499 10217 10037 10218 10009 10208 10370 10208 10009
26. 4801 5761 Q X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 Signal present X No output X Output according to Resolution setting i p Scaler When A to H X No signal 1 The Picture Adjust setting can be made Contrast Brightness set IS page 45 480p 720p 480p 576p 1080 720p Chroma Level Hue Wallpaper or set background color displayed 2 The Picture Adjust setting can be made DNR Enhancer Output according to Resolution setting i o Scaler When H to Sharpness is set IE page 45 3 Superimposed over video signal GUI menu not displayed A Only displayed when the MENU button is pressed 5 f the input signal is in SECAM format it is converted to PAL for output is 96 A E 5 h eh 5 Video Convert ________Inputsignal ___ 00 Monitor output Normally Monitor output when GUI menu displayed Ideo Conver HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x L x Jj 6 O s __ O x L0 x O xXx _ x 0 O 9 O Es qp Eg Jr o Signal present X No signal x O O x x owe o O9 9 x x oswe x j 9 9 o xo swine Oo j 9 Ocowoemn x gt j o o o O componenn
27. DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx DOLBY PRO LOGIC Il DTS NEO 6 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS SURROUND neural 7CH STEREO SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT DOLBY HEADPHONE OM ORO Ree O ELO ILC ILC IO Signals and adjustability in the different modes Channel output Parameter default values are shown in parentheses Surround Surround D COMP AFDM Cinema E NP NEAL Kosi OFF ee nH ORO an 0 feo amp HO MO BO BO 0 1 OR 19 1 x 000000000000000 x 000000000000000 x x 000000000000000 O 0 x 000000000000x00 O x x ee x Ed x IIO HO BO BOR OR ORO Bee x ES X ES X Be X Bae X x O Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting NOTE1 NOTE2 NOTE6 NOTE ie T TOS This parameter can be used when GUI menu Manual Setup Audio Setup This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters Mode is set to Cinema IZ page 50 This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters Mode is set to Cinema or Pro Logic IS page 50 EXT IN Setup Mode is set to DSP 12857 page 33 When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals When playing Dolby True HD signal When playing Dolby
28. RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A MAX AC OUTLETS AC 120V 60Hz 70 20 D lt o D e STANDARD HOME THX CINEMA QUICK SELECT 1 POWER CH SELECT AV lt pP CH SELECT About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Operations Connect the HDMI to the AVP AIHDCI with equipment compatible with the HDMI control function Put the power on for all the equipment connected to the HDMI Check the settings for all the equipment connected to the HDMI and make HDMI available to them X Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings X Operations 1 3 do not have to be repeated once started X Carryout Operations 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be plugged out Switch the television input to the HDMI connected to the AVP A1HDCI Switch the AVP A1HDCI input to the HDMI input source and check if the picture from the player is ok Put the television power on standby and check if the AVP A1HDCI goes into standby If the AVP A1HDCI does not work please check the following s the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Control Control I page 32 set to ON e s the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Contro
29. e U V Z ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DirecTV Gateway Go Video Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush iBUYPOWER Linksys Media Center PC Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic Philips RCA ReplayTV Samsung sonic Blue Sony Stack 9 Systemax Tagar Systems Tivo Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo ZT Group 21972 21972 21972 21972 20739 21972 20614 21972 21972 21977 20 39 20 38 21972 21972 21972 21977 21972 2197 7 21977 21977 20614 20616 20618 20739 20880 20614 20616 20 39 20614 20616 20636 21972 21972 21977 21972 20618 20636 20739 21005 21977 21896 21972 2 1977 21972 21972 DVD Player 1 A 3D LAB AKus A Trend Acoustic Solutions AEG AFK Aim Airis Aiwa 30503 30539 31158 30714 307 15 s0730 311226 30770 30788 30790 31923 a101 31152 JIES 30672 30699 30833 30672 31005 31224 31250 30533 30641 Akashi AKI Akira Akura Alba Alco Alize All Tel Allegro Altacom Amitech Amoi Amphion Media Works Amstrad AMW Anam Ansonic Apex Digital Aristona Arrgo ASCOMTEC Asono Aspire Digital Atacom Audiosonic Audiovox Audioworld Autovox Auvio Awa Axion Base Basic Line Baze BBK Beep Bellagio Belson Binatone Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blu sens Blue Nova International Blue Parade 30690 3069
30. 10000 10765 10767 10780 11037 10037 10074 10051 10374 10009 10264 10009 10170 10455 10218 10556 11037 10217 10208 10287 10714 10418 10362 10030 10463 11556 10696 10556 10361 TOZA 10036 10817 10178 10668 10455 10037 10170 10037 10218 10217 10819 10163 10001 10661 10374 10817 10817 10195 10200 10455 10487 10668 10714 11191 11363 10335 10560 10486 10668 Tre SHE 10057 10778 10668 10661 10487 10374 10335 10264 10208 10163 10009 10030 10092 11037 10070 10820 10821 10370 10418 10009 10264 10817 10817 Changhong Chengdu Ching Ta Chun Yun Chunfeng Chung Hsin Chunsun Cimline Cinema Cineral Cinex Citek Citizen City Clarion Clarivox Classic Clatronic Clayton CMS Hightec Colortyme Commercial Solutions Concorde Condor Conia Conic Conrac Conrowa Contec Continental Edison Cosmel Craig Crosley Crown Crown Mustang CS Electronics CIX Curtis Mathes CXC Cybertron Cytronix D D vision 10156 10508 10819 11156 10009 10092 10000 10700 10009 10180 10009 10009 10672 10451 10648 10047 10054 10180 10092 10009 10180 10037 10030 10009 10264 11037 10217 10047 10178 11447 10009 10009 10418 10820 10178 10808 10156 10698
31. 25 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the product Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up static charges Article 810 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit size of grounding conductors location of antenna discharge unit connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding electrode See Figure A Lightning For added protection for this product during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits When installing an outside antenna system extreme care should be taken to keep f
32. 2Way Remote is set to Used you cannot use port 1 of the RS 232C terminal for the external controller i Dimmer Adjust display brightness of the receiver Selectable items Dim m Operating from the main unit Press the DIMMER button mE Dark OFF Bright BEEN OFF Dark If POA A1HDCI is connected using the control link POA A1HDCI meter operation is turned OFF when the AVP A1HDCI display is turned OFF Setup Lock Protect settings from inadvertent change Selectable items ON e When Setup Lock is set to ON the settings listed below can no longer be changed Also SETUP LOCKED is displayed if you attempt to operate related buttons GUI menu operations RESTORER Night Mode Parameter Room Channel Level Audio Delay e To cancel the setting press the MENU button to re display the Setup Lock screen then change the setting to OFF IE Maintenance Mode This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson E Add New Feature Display the new functions which can be purchased for downloading or installer For professional use only This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the AVP A1HDCI s status and make settings via the Internet Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer IE Firmware Update Update the firmware of the receiver If POA A1HDCI
33. T A A A x ri 2 DV HD SA 1 2 1 DVD 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 Cl corn 9 9 E jos HDP SAT SIEGE OES A A 20 00 1 GROUND 7 um 3 Em 2 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE AUDIO 23 Connecting the Power Cord Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord XR Gist To household power outlet AC 120 V 60 Hz Power cord included OPTICAL 2 fa f WR 1 3 DVR 2 Connection to the AC outlets e hese outlets supply power to external audio devices e The power supplied from this outlets turns on and off together with the set s power switch e Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 120 W 1 A can be connected e Insert the AC plugs securely Incomplete connections could cause noise e Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment In addition do not connect audio devices such as high electricity consumption power amplifiers e g POA A1HDCI Once Connections are Completed Turning the Power On amp page 56 Examples of GUI Screen Displays Cursor Position Display Some typical examples are described below LJ Icon GUI Menu O
34. use with DENON LINK connections make the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source Assign Digital DENON LINK I page 46 Connections to Other Devices Video Camera Game Console Video camera Game console VIDEO AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL OUT OUT QUICK SELECT LIFIER AVP A1HDCI Component with Multi channel Output connectors DVD player Super Audio CD player External decoder AUDIO SUB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND WOOFER TU WLAN ANTENNA ZF D 2 HDP 4 c 1 TV CBL 2 DVE 3 DVR 2 4 VCR xe e DENON 2 Denon e To play the analog input signals input to the EXT IN connectors oress the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button on the main remote control unit and select EXT IN or make the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source Input Mode Input Mode EXT IN page 45 e he video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player IS page 13 e o play copyright protected discs connect the AVP A1HDCI s EXT IN connector with the DVD player s analog multi channel output connector 18 5 5 ES 5 o USB Port XM connector e The AVP A1HDCI is an XM Rea
35. www rhapsody com denon signup Cannot login e Login information is incorrect to Rhapsody Username or Password Is incorrect is displayed e Trial period has expired e When the trial period has finished there 15 a limit to the playing time and number of tracks that can be played e When the trial period has finished there 15 a limit to the playing time and number of tracks that can be played eThe AVP A1HDCI does When the playlist is compiled in respond to playlist compilation PC Application it is registered to My Library In this way the playlist can be played in AVP A1HDCI Cannnot play Stops in the e Get a full account middle of playing Cannot compile Playlist X Need full account e Cannot be done with Delete from PC Application A1HDCI Cannot delete Rhapsody Channel registered in My Channels 37 64 68 64 68 64 68 e Cannot A1HDCI Cannot delete be done with AVP e Delete from PC Application Tracks Playlists Channels registered in My Library X Need full account Wireless LAN Symptom Cannot connect to network Played sound is interrupted or sound cannot be played eThe settings of the SSID and network key WEP are incorrect e The reception is poor and the signals cannot be received e There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap e There are multiple networks and the
36. 00173 00299 01087 01099 01251 01535 01535 V Variosat Ventana Vestel VH Sat Viasat ViewSat Visionic VisionNet Visiosat Viva Vivid Voom VTech W Wavelength Wewa Wharfedale Winbox Winte Wisi Worldsat X Xcom XMS Xsat Xtreme Y Yakumo Yamada Yes Z Zehnder Zenith Zeta Technology Zodiac 00173 00200 01251 00299 01682 01232 00125 01283 01557 00142 00710 00713 01413 01457 01718 00856 01162 00869 00818 01232 01413 00455 01284 01801 00288 00173 00288 00455 00123 00710 01214 01251 01543 00123 01075 00123 00713 00847 01214 01323 01300 01413 01718 00887 00394 00504 00818 01075 01232 01251 01334 01412 01413 00856 01856 00200 01801 Satellite Receiver PVR Combination x1 X1 A sat Allvision Amstrad Atsat B B ytronic British Sky Broadcasting BskyB Bush C Canal Satellite Comag D Digifusion DigiQuest Digiturk 01300 01412 BS 01300 01412 01175 01175 01662 01645 01338 01412 01645 01300 01076 e n m DirecTV Dish Network System Dishpro DMT Dream Multimedia Echostar Expressvu Foxtel GbSAT Gecco Globo HDT Hirschmann Homecast Hughes Network Systems Humax Huth Hyundai Kaon Kathrein LG Maximum Mediacom Medion Microstar Morgan s Motorola MTEC Multichoice MySky NEOTION Nokia Opentel Orbis Pace Panasonic Philips Pilotime Proscan R
37. 00200 00775 01775 00853 01631 01283 00394 00455 01284 01291 00887 00455 00173 00345 00847 00853 00879 01291 01622 01099 01100 PRESET CODE K Hauppauge HB HDT Hills Hirschmann Hisense Hitachi Homecast Hornet Houston HTS Hughes Network Systems Humax Huth Hyundai iCan ID Digital ILLUSION sat iLo Imperial Indovision Ingelen Innova Interstar InVideo ISkyB Italtel ITT Nokia Jadeworld Jaeger Jerrold Jiuzhou JOK JVC K SAT Kamm Kaon Kalelco Kathrein Kennex Kenwood Klap Kocmoc IB Koscom Kosmos Kreiling 01672 01214 01801 01159 01232 00125 00173 00299 00710 00882 01085 01111 01232 01412 01535 00749 00819 00455 01250 01284 01518 01523 01525 01214 01680 01700 01300 00775 00775 01775 01142 00749 01749 01442 00863 01176 01225 01406 01427 01675 01743 01790 01915 01075 01075 01159 01367 01176 01557 01631 01535 01334 01428 01672 00887 00882 00099 01214 00871 00887 00871 00455 00723 00873 00642 01334 00869 01450 00710 00775 01507 01531 01775 00713 00713 01300 01111 00123 00173 00200 00249 00394 00442 00480 00504 00658 00713 00818 01221 01416 01561 01567 00125 00853 00710 01333 01043 00442 01333 00249 00658 Kreiselmeyer Kross L amp S Electronic Labgear LaSAT Lava Legend Legrand Lemon Lenco Lenoxx LG Lifesat
38. 10037 10668 10370 10037 10374 10217 10614 ibs 10037 10264 10714 10264 10180 10875 10009 10217 11958 10264 10009 10073 10343 10817 10556 10037 10374 11037 10195 10178 10001 10264 10821 10195 10606 11037 10017 11191 11756 10163 10370 10820 11909 10109 10217 10370 10374 10715 10820 10370 10486 10092 10623 11937 11951 10011 10036 10264 10374 10374 10661 10109 10208 11196 10163 10217 10455 10556 11163 10361 10455 10030 10009 10208 10374 10661 10370 10418 10714 10715 10154 10093 10218 10418 10374 10821 11037 Blackway Blaupunkt Blue Sky Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Brother BSR BIC Bush Caihong Cailing Candle Canton Capehart Capetronic Capsonic Carad Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CGE Celebrity Celera Celestial Centrex Centrum Centurion CGE Changcheng Changfei Changfeng Changhai 10218 10036 10327 10037 10499 10715 10009 10037 10180 10109 10625 10037 10037 10217 10178 10236 11938 10264 10163 10218 11900 10714 10614 10371 10218 10037 10009 10748 10030 10218 10017 10036 10030 10264 10610 10037 10030 10036 10054 10009 10037 10037 10037
39. 81 LU Buijoous lqnoul Language Select the language displayed on the GUI screen Menu tree Source Select Manual Setup Selectable items Francais w Operating from the main unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting D Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Use the AV button to set GUI Language 3 Use the lt gt button to make the setting 4 Press the ENTER MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings Language related to playing input sources Input Source Selection Menu tree TUNER 43 m Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Operation on the main unit Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob X If Rec Select or Video Select is selected press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob Operation on the main remote control unit Press the SOURCE SELECT button The desired input source can be selected directly 4 DVD Hpp 77 RCSETUP TV VCR Main remote control unit SOURCE SELECT Main unit e operate the AVP A1HDCI using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode 87 73 Remote Control Unit Operations e Pressing the DVD HDP button and the VCR DVR button o
40. Auto tuner presets 875 89 1 98 1 1079 90 1 90 1 90 1 AT AS8 00 1 MHz 1 520 600 1000 1400 1500 1710 kHz 90 1 90 1 MHz RDS Radio Data System RDS works only on the FM band is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional information along with the regular radio program signal The following three types of RDS information can be received with this unit Program Type PTY PTY identifies the type of RDS program The program types and their displays are as follows NEWS News Nostalgia INFOM Information JAZZ Jazz SPORTS Sports CLASSICL Classical TALK Talk R amp B R amp B ROCK Rock SOFT R amp B Soft R amp B CLS ROCK Classic rock Language ADLTHIT Adult hits Religious music SOFT Soft rock Religious talk TOP 40 Top 40 Personality COUNTRY Country PUBLIC Public OLDIES Oldies College SOFT Soft WEATHER Weather Traffic Program TP TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area before leaving home Radio Text RT RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display The operations described below using SEARCH will not function in areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts RDS Search Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS service Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press TUNER AMP mode
41. V AUX i p Scaler Make settings for i o scaler function Selectable items AtoH amp HtoH OFF This be set when Video Convert is set to OFF e The Ato amp H to can be set to the input source assigned to the HDMI input connector e Ato amp H to H setting Deep color 10 bit 12 bit signals are converted into 8 bit signals The i p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer s resolution signals are input 45 Resolution Set resolution for video signal output to HDMI Selectable items Auto 480p 576p 1080 720p 1080 Uu Operating from the main unit Press the SCALE button Auto 480p 576p gt 1080 1080 e This be set when i o Scaler is set to anything other than OFF e When the i p Scaler is setto Ato H amp H to H the resolutions can be setup to the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal Progressive Mode Select optimum progressive mode for video material Selectable items Video1 Video2 This can be set when i p Scaler is set to anything other than OFF Aspect This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 4801 5761 or 480 5 76 input signals from the HDMI output connector Selectable items Full Normal d This can be set when i p Scaler is set to anything other than OFF input Mode Make
42. a O zn X ES X ES E23 X NS O EE n am m E O T m m T O x zu O ar 5 mu 4 pU m O e m O T X x x x x x gt gt 5 e 3 lt gt H 4a zm zm E Bas ca es ca ea ea an an a cul lt EE B C Ea Ea p X ES X ES X ES X X lt ES EJ X B 8 S 4H O a a X X X X X X X X X X X X X x X EU x ES X ES X ES X e n n n O x x O O O O O e O x x x x O x 2 O 9 O O O e x X X X A X X X X X X X X X X X X XP X ES xX ES xX ES RS ES E c X X X X X gt x X X X X X X X O MOM O PII xp O monn On O O e e O O O O O O O O O OR OR COR 1 O 19 6 EM PP W ea PP E ea mI TI a EM E P LE LE X ES X ES X ES X ES X EN X Ba lt X ES X ES ES X ES X X EN X ES X x O Ti T O T n Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable NOTES BASS 6 dB TREBLE 0 dB NOTEA BASS 6 dB TREBLE 4 dB NOTE5 Can be used according to the Direct Mode setting NOTE6 DSP mode only 1
43. settings Menutree Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 Items to be checked Select Source Input Mode EQ Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 3 see page 72 Preset Station Shows information about preset stations Menu tree Preset Station Input source TUNER HD Radio NET USB Items to be checked A1 G8 When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed the set s status can be checked on the display SOURCE SELECT lt PHONES gt MASTER VOLUME p lt ON STANDBY gt lt POWER gt Playback amp Preparations Turning the Power On Press lt POWER gt The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER ON The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on To operate the AVP A1HDCI using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode I 73 Remote Control Unit Operations Turning the Power Off POWER ON E DPress lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER OFF LAN POWER OFF The power is set to the standby mode 2 Press POWER MASTER The power indicator turns off and so does the power VOLUME Power continues be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the 2g power is in the
44. 1030 30690 30768 31004 31228 30789 30790 30833 31483 30713 30768 30651 30690 30770 30651 30798 30768 30833 30898 31036 31227 31347 31382 31483 31730 31923 30571 30522 30511 30551 31503 30784 30665 30788 30790 30898 30789 31224 30503 30573 30939 00895 31045 31154 31503 31510 31769 30831 30872 31321 31327 30730 V DVD Recorder 1 Tredex TruVision Tsinghua Tongfang TSM Umax Unimax United Universum Uptek upXus Urban Concepts US Logic Venturer Vestel Victor Vieta Viewmaster Voxson Vtrek Waitec Walkvision Waltham Welkin Wellington Weltstar Wesder Wharfedale Wilson Windsor Windy Sam WIZE Woxter Xbox Xenius XLogic XMS Xoro Yakumo Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith Zeus 4Kus 30843 31451 31205 31224 30690 31151 30770 30675 30695 30699 30713 30730 30788 30884 31115 31152 31228 31367 31832 30591 30713 30741 30790 30763 31345 30503 30539 30839 30790 30713 30884 31530 31597 30705 30862 31224 30690 30730 30774 30831 31228 91151591224 23s 30 17 31530 30831 30 13 30 13 30699 30686 30751 30752 30790 31832 30713 30573 31115 31005 31151 31224 30522 31708 30790 30768 31152 31228 30770 30788 31183 31250 31004 31056 30872 31004 31056 31151 31158 30490 30539 30646 305
45. 10487 10480 10374 10371 mu vg Indiana 10037 irstline 10714 10808 11037 11191 10343 10335 10264 10218 Infinit 10054 y Elbe 10037 10217 10218 10362 11363 11371 10217 10037 10036 10035 SEE IP InFocus 11164 10610 10047 10054 10154 10000 10011 10009 10009 10036 10037 10163 Elcit 10163 Fisher 10036 10208 10217 10361 Gorenje 10370 Hinari 10208 10218 10264 10352 Ingelen 10163 10487 10610 10714 Electroband 10000 10370 GPM 10218 10443 Ingersol 10009 Electrograph 11755 Flint 10053 10037 10170 Hisawa 2 ene Inno Hit 10009 10217 10218 11163 Electrohome 10154 10000 10463 10150 Force 11149 mE 10163 10361 10371 10487 10208 10508 10556 10780 10178 10030 10073 10714 11163 Hisense Formenti 10037 10163 10821 10860 1022 1155 Innowert 10865 11298 Elekta 10009 10264 i Gran Prix 10648 11170 11208 11363 Tea 10773 10820 Elfunk 11037 11208 Fortress 10033 10036 10037 10108 10163 10047 10054 10017 10000 _ ELG 10037 Fraba 10037 10370 Granada 10208 10217 10226 10343 ECRIRE Ut neignia 10548 10560 u Inte 10017 10145 Elin 10009 10037 10361 10548 Friac 10009 10037 10163 10218 10092 10744 10877 10634 Elite 10037 10218 maoan 10009 10163 10217 10264 x 10374 10455 10610 10668 Hitachi 11037 11137 11148 11156 eM rontec 0009 10163 10217 1026 Grandin 10714 10715 10865 10880 11170 11225 11576 11904 10037 10109
46. 10508 10156 10051 10030 11704 10817 10 04 10508 10499 10264 10217 10011 10009 10327 10370 10371 11371 10218 10556 10217 10343 10092 10009 10036 10037 10218 10264 10092 10092 Nishi Nobliko Nogamatic Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Normerel Novatronic NTC Nu Tec Nyon Oceanic Odeon Okano Olevia Omega Omni Onida Onimax Onwa Opera Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orcom Orion Orline Ormond Osaki Osio Oso Osume Otic Otto Versand Pace Pacific Palladium Palsonic Panama Panashiba 10030 10070 10109 10163 10374 10610 10748 10217 10037 10343 10037 10037 10092 10455 10000 10163 10264 10009 11144 10264 10748 10053 10714 10180 10602 10037 10154 10150 10650 10887 10093 10037 11504 10017 10178 10264 10880 10037 10668 10037 10374 10037 10218 10036 11498 10093 10195 10361 10092 10037 11037 10037 10327 10714 10001 10264 10778 10009 10001 10208 10480 10631 10824 10109 10560 10374 10698 10208 10037 11240 10698 11255 10218 10250 10178 10236 11463 10443 11196 10218 11037 10217 10556 10037 10036 10217 10512 10443 11137 10163 10370 IRS 10037 10418 11196 10037 10346 10361 10548 10606 10195 10287
47. 10702 10819 10625 10486 10287 10037 10037 10037 10037 10037 10009 10009 10036 10163 10037 10009 10037 10009 EYAL 10009 10030 10037 10714 11248 10009 10780 10887 10047 11447 10287 10625 10035 10074 10335 10512 10073 10250 10650 11267 10556 10217 10051 10093 10036 11040 10208 10698 10463 10178 10343 10163 11504 10714 10587 10346 10109 10163 10037 10037 10217 10264 10037 10374 10092 10556 10808 11298 10217 10178 10047 10593 10036 10109 10343 10335 10051 10060 10178 10218 10217 MSS 10180 10092 10217 10821 10712 10560 10343 10074 10218 10556 10668 10455 10217 11163 10264 11037 10210 10715 110087 10648 11037 10668 11137 11498 11556 10218 10374 10001 11904 10037 10343 10037 10163 10361 20109 10560 10073 10264 10499 10343 10499 10226 10092 10264 10418 10150 10218 10820 10698 10498 10335 10073 Tiane Tiny TMK TML TNCI Tobishi Tobo Tocom Tokai Tokaido Tokyo Tomashi Tongguang Tongtel Topline Toshiba Totevision Towada Toyoda Toyomenka Trakton Trans Continens TRANS continents Transonic Triad Trident Trio Tristar Triumph Truetone Tuntex TVS TVTEXT 9
48. 10712 11037 Sonitron 10208 10217 10370 11163 11556 11982 Semivox 10180 Philharmonic 10217 Quartz 10150 10178 Sakai 10163 Semp 10156 Sonneclair 10037 11454 10054 10017 10000 0 10250 10051 10009 10035 Sak Sonoko 10009 10037 10217 10264 10051 10178 10030 10171 10650 10865 0455 10009 Philips 10092 11961 11756 11254 10011 10037 10070 10074 ee 10163 10208 10361 10480 Senma 10035 Sonolor 10163 10208 10361 10548 10690 10556 10512 10374 mee 10109 10195 10200 10327 10548 10631 T TEE HERE Sontec 10009 10037 10370 peel Hae 10200 10108 10361 10512 10668 11037 Salsa 10335 1 D 10017 10154 11100 10000 Questa 10036 10047 10154 10093 10178 Shancha 10264 10817 m 10150 10053 10011 10036 Phocus 10714 ee 10036 10030 10171 10092 10009 10009 10208 10226 10264 Y 10037 10074 10353 10650 Phoenix 10037 10163 10370 10486 mE mm e 10650 10700 11755 10817 11505 11651 11751 11904 haofeng 10145 10817 Sound amp Vision 10218 10374 _ Rabbit 10047 10047 10054 10017 10154 10054 10093 10180 10053 e Radialva 10163 10218 E ty Sh 10030 10009 10036 10200 10702 10178 10030 10092 arp 10650 10653 10688 Soundwave 10037 10418 10715 10166 10011 10037 10109 p 10037 10217 10556 10814 10766 10718 10618 O mm 11952 Bird 10163 10170 10287 10361 10587
49. 20041 20048 20081 20209 20278 Zilog 20035 20037 20240 20000 20209 20278 20479 20037 20000 21593 20060 20035 20045 20000 20352 20278 20037 20047 20240 20000 20642 20278 20000 20348 20742 20002 220278 20642 21278 2202 5 Crosley Crown Curtis Mathes Cybernex CyberPower Cyrus Daewoo Dansai Dantax Daytron De Graaf Decca Degraff Deitron Dell Denon Derwent Diamant Diamond Digitor DirecTV Domland DSE Dual Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Elbe Electrohome Electrophonic Elin Elta Emerald Emerex Emerson ESA ESC EuroLine Ferguson Fidelity Finlandia Finlux 20035 20037 20060 20000 21035 20240 21972 20081 20037 20278 20642 20278 20352 20037 20048 20046 20081 20041 20048 20278 2 19 20081 20041 20037 20348 20642 20 39 20209 20642 20081 20348 20081 20039 20240 20278 20060 20037 20240 20278 20184 20032 20035 20240 20043 20348 21479 21137 20240 21593 20000 20348 20240 20037 20042 20106 20081 20081 20000 20278 20480 20035 20162 20240 20041 20278 20432 20045 20104 20209 20046 20352 20637 sll To 20278 20081 20042 20104 20000 20067 20209 20352 20081 20042 20104 20042 20000 20041 20278 20000 20104 20038 20
50. 30770 30790 30831 30713 30841 30850 31233 31421 30751 31152 30843 30741 30783 30790 30582 30702 30788 30705 30730 31163 31923 30713 30843 30573 30664 30665 30713 31247 31920 30672 31923 30651 30713 30831 31004 31224 Home Electronics 30730 30770 Home Tech Industries 31224 Hoyo 30665 Humax 30646 Hyundai 30783 30850 31061 31228 iLo 31348 Ingelen 30788 Ingersol 31023 Initial 30839 30717 Inno Hit 30713 Insignia 31268 Integra 30571 30627 31634 Irradio 30869 31115 31224 31233 IRT 30783 ISP 30695 Jamo 31036 Jaton 30665 JBL 30702 JDB 30730 JDV 31367 Jeken 30699 Jepssen 31250 JMB 30695 JNC 30672 31271 JSI 31423 JVC 30503 30539 30558 30623 30867 31164 31597 31860 jWin 31051 Kansas Technologies 31233 31530 Karcher 30783 Kawasaki 30790 Kendo 30672 30699 30713 30831 Kennex 30713 30770 30898 Kenwood 30490 30534 Kiiro 30770 Kiss 30665 30841 31523 KLH 30815 30717 30790 31020 Kloss 30533 Koda 31230 Konka 31182 Koss 30651 31061 31423 Kreisen 31421 KXD 91921911923 Lasonic 30627 30798 30789 Lawson 30768 Lecson 31533 Leiker 30872 onmes Lenoir 31228 Lenoxx 30690 30838 Lexia 30699 30768 LG Lifetec Limit LiteOn Lodos Loewe Logik Logix Luker Lumatron Lunatron Luxman Luxor Magnasonic Magnat Magnavox Magnex Majestic Manhattan Marantz Mark Marquant Matsul Maxdorf Maxe
51. DSTV Durabrand DX Antenna Echostar Einhell Elap Elsat Elta Emme Esse Energy Sistem Enge EP Sat Esat Eurieult 01505 01005 00775 01775 01283 01704 01075 00200 01237 01375 00642 00879 01433 01284 01530 01505 01005 00775 00455 00610 00713 00853 00871 01086 01200 01323 01409 01418 01473 01775 00713 00713 01567 00713 00200 01659 00871 01631 00713 01251 00455 00879 00882 PRESET CODE 2 Eurocrypt EuroLine Europa Europhon Eurosky Eurostar Eutelsat Expressvu Fenner Ferguson Finlandia Finlux Flair Mate FMD Force Fortec Star Foxtel Fracapro Planet Fracarro France Telecom Freesat FTE FIEmaxima Fuba Fugionkyo Funai Galaxis Gardiner Garnet GbSAT GE Gecco General Instrument General Satellite GF Good Friends GF Star Globo GOD Digital GOI Gold Box Gold Vision Golden Interstar GoldStar Goodmans Gradiente Granada Grundig Handan Hanseatic 00455 01251 00863 00299 00262 00299 00818 00713 00775 01775 00713 00455 01291 01743 00455 00455 00713 01251 01413 01457 01101 01083 00455 00497 00795 00879 01162 01176 01356 00871 00125 00871 00871 00882 00863 00713 00863 00173 00262 00299 00394 01214 01251 01801 00125 01377 00853 00863 01101 01111 01557 00816 01075 01214 00392 00566 01412 00669 01176 01043 01043 01251 01334 01412 01429 01626
52. Example Movie sources Dolby DTS Surround etc THX or THX Cinema mode Speakers A Music sources DVD video DTS CD etc Dolby DTS Surround Speakers B The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing multi channel music 85 Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer 45 60 Surround Surround back speaker A speaker Front speaker j 2 to 3 feet 7 60 90 Point slightly downwards Surround speaker B Surround bac speaker Surround speaker B As seen from the side As seen from above 2 When not using surround back speakers Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer 60 Surround speaker Front speaker n P d 2 to 3 feet 60 to 90 cm i pu Surround speakers As seen from above As seen from the side The AVP A1HDCI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater Dolby Surround Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories A total of 5 1 channels are played 3 front channels FL FR and C 2 surround channels SL and SR and the LFE channel for low frequencies Because of this there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound fie
53. S VIDEO Monitor Out Input signal Monitor output RENE SENE x ovma x Used VIDEO 2 Not used Input signal Monitor output S Signal present X No signal os ae present X No output a O WIDEO Lo x j x LO COMPONEND 1 O MDEO C COMPONENT 2 O S VIDEO COMPONENT 2 S VIDEO VIDEO 2 COMPONENT 1 VIDEO Output present No output With On screen display the VIDEO signal is superimposed output With On screen display the S VIDEO signal is superimposed output 98 5 5 Buijoous lqnoul Troubleshooting If a problem should arise first check the following 1 Are the connections correct 2 Is the set being operated as described in the owner s manual 3 Are the other components operating properly If this unit does not operate properly check the items listed in the table below Should the problem persist there may be a malfunction In this case disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase General Symptom Power does not turn on or turns off directly after it was turned on No sound is produced from speakers Display is off DOLBY DIGITAL indicator does not appear on display 99 e Connection of the power cord is e The connection with the input devices or power amp is faulty e Device you want
54. Watching the iPod s screen use AV to select Main remote control unit Photos or Videos Press ENTER until the image you want to view is displayed RANDOM RANDOM TV Out at the iPod s Slideshow Settings or Video Settings must be set to On in order to display the iPod s photo data or videos on the monitor For details see the iPod s operating instructions Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 63 Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices or Rhapsody This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture JPEG fi les stored on a computer or USB memory device or Rhapsody _1 About the Internet radio function e nternet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in The AVP A1HDCI is equipped with the following Internet radio functions Stations can be selected by genre and region Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset Internet radio stations in and WMA Windows Media Audio format can be listened to Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer X The function is managed
55. When Dynamic EQ is set to ON you cannot use the Tone setting 2 Can be set when GUI menu Parameter Audio Room EQ e page 53 is set to Audyssey Audyssey Flat Audyssey Byp L R 90 Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals Input signals WMA DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD Note Media Audio DTS ES ES DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD d mod ANALOG PCM DSCRT MTRX P DIGITAL EX ee DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio meee mam MPEG 4 With Flag With Flag With Flag 5 1 5 4ch 4 3ch multi ch AAC FLAC Da S DSC Hl ES MTRX6 1 THX THX SURROUND EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode THX Games Mode THX Cinema PLIIx C THX PLII C THX DOLBY PL THX NEO 6 THX MULTI CH 71 THX MULTI CH 5 1 THX STANDARD DTS SURROUND DTS ES DSCRT6 1 DTS ES MIRX6 1 DTS SURROUND Dis 96 24 DTS PLIIx CINEMA DTS PLIIx MUSIC DTS NEO 6 DTS NEO 6 CINEMA DTS NEO 6 MUSIC 29 x aX Be Om Om OA ESOISIOISICESO S 28 x E x Bae EC 28 x Es O O OF O 3 29 1 0 Xx P x x O O O x x x x x ES x ES ES O KO O ESL ES x ES O 81 O LO O EO x ES x ES x ES ESI O ESI O KG ES x x O O O O O x x x x O lt ESI Ba Bae gt ERI ISI Bea Ba gt gt ERI Ba Ba Ba gt
56. ccm aA 1 fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward MENU ENTER Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause SETUP wy sin i AV lt P Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop l sexe E Power on Power on Power on SEARCH x lle sourceorr row Poweroff SS ME CH x 3 SHUFFLE 2 MENU Meng Mew MB exec geo 410 AV lt b ee ee ee I 13 ENTER Enter setting Enter Page forward screen Browse SETUP SEARCH oet up oet up oet up Remote mode switching Press and eR NN RETURN Retum Cancel Retun O CH SHUFFLE owitch channels track album shuffle play BE 0 9 0 Selcttock Select track Selecttrk Selettack Special Remarks _ DO 0 amp L Special Remarks D Only one component can be preset for each mode If a new code is preset the previous code is automatically cleared 2 The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand Check beforehand e Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the DVD bEv1 mode Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the DVD bEv2 mode e Preset a VCR for the VCR DEV1 mode Preset a tape deck for the VCR
57. modes Last Function Memory This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set When the power is turned back on the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set Backup Memory The various settings are backed up for about 1 week even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected yoeqheld Resetting the Microprocessor Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed All settings are reset when the microcomputer is reset 1 Turn off the power using lt POWER gt Press lt POWER gt while simultaneously pressing lt STANDARD gt and lt HOME THX CINEMA gt Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second release the two buttons If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second start over from step 1 72 Operating DENON Audio Components Presetting The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate 1 Press MODE SELECTOR for the component to be ju nOn Remote Control Unit Operations operated The indicator for the component to be operated flashes Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to C AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 iPod preset Main Remote Control Unit AMP SYSTEM CALL iPod T _ e On the main remote control unit the display switches according TUNER FM AM XM Q
58. output level and impedance Frequency response 1 Tuner section Receiving Range Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity S N IHF A Total harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz 2 5 mV 1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 74 dB A weighting with 5 mV input 150 mV 0 03 1 kHz 3 V 1 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 O ohms C color signal 0 286 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 O ohms signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms PR CR signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms b Hz 100 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF FM note uV at 75 O ohms 0 dBf 1 x 1075 W 875 MHz 1079 MHz 1 0 uV 11 2 dBf MONO 1 6 uV 15 3 dBf STEREO 23 uV 38 5 dBf MONO 77dB STEREO 72 dB MONO 02 STEREO 0 3 AM 520 kHz 1710 kHz 19 uV LL HD Radio section Receiving Range Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity S N IHF A Total harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz L Wireless LAN Network type wireless LAN standards Transfer rate Security Used frequency range No of channels General Power supply Power consumption Maximum external dimensions Weight FM AM note uV at 75 O ohms dBf 1 x 1075 W 875 MHz 1079 MHz 530 kHz 1710 kHz 1 0 uV 11 2 dBf 20 uV MONO 1 6 uV 15 3 dBf ST
59. to select TUNER To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv1 mode Iz amp page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press SEARCH to select RDS Press CHANNEL The search for RDS stations begins automatically X f no RDS stations are found with the above operation all the reception bands are searched X When a broadcast station is found that station s name appears on the display 5 To continue searching repeat steps 2 to 3 X If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been searched NO RDS is displayed PTY Search Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program type PTY For a description of each program type refer to Program Type Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press TUNER AMP mode to select TUNER To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv1 mode e page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press SEARCH to select PTY Watching the display press AV to call out the desired program type 5 Press CHANNEL PTY search begins automatically X f there is no station broadcasting the designated program type with the above operation all the reception bands are searched X The station name is displayed on the display after searching Stops 6 To continue searching repeat steps 2 to 4 X
60. 00200 00713 01693 01848 01850 01519 01334 01322 00099 00887 01322 00713 01232 00713 01659 00869 00200 00713 00723 01704 00455 00723 00751 00853 00873 01023 01223 01723 00455 01611 01505 00442 00887 01232 01412 00394 00713 01043 01283 01611 00724 00879 01232 01334 01412 01099 01100 00497 00345 01232 00200 00329 00455 00497 00795 00847 00853 00887 01175 01323 01356 01423 01693 01717 01848 01850 01284 01375 01111 00710 00299 01409 01159 00615 00879 01333 01433 00247 00701 00455 00847 01304 01404 01508 01526 01527 00173 00455 01159 00710 00724 01457 Philips Phonotrend Pilotime Pino Pioneer Planet Plasmatic PMB Polytron Portland Preisner Premier Prima Primacom Primestar Profile Promax Proscan Proton ONS Quadral Quelle Radiola RadioShack Radix RCA Rebox Regal RFT Roadstar Rollmaster Rover Rownsonic SAB Saba Sabre Sagem Samsung Sat Control Sat Team SAT Satec Satelco Satplus 01142 00749 01749 00775 00724 00819 01076 00722 00099 00710 00455 00818 00200 00847 00853 00173 01114 00133 01442 01543 01672 00863 01200 01339 01334 01142 00329 00853 01308 01442 00871 00442 00713 01611 00394 01296 00262 01101 01113 01366 00723 00853 00873 01429 00795 01111 00869 00710 00455 00392 00566 01535 01367 01402 01404 007
61. 00817 01230 01510 01082 00000 00003 01376 00476 01187 00303 01496 00817 00008 00008 00276 00003 00303 01068 00276 01060 01877 00877 01060 01068 00000 00008 00000 00008 00000 01305 00317 01877 00877 01500 00000 00003 00000 00303 00276 00000 00817 00000 00003 00000 00144 00778 00840 01060 00276 00003 00276 00003 00810 00276 01060 01068 00237 00008 01577 00144 01488 00525 00817 00144 00533 01666 Scientific Atlanta Skyworth Sony Sprucer Starcom StarHub Sumitomo Supercable Taihan TCL Telewest Time Warner cable TongKook Torx Toshiba Trans PX is United Cable US Electronics Videoway Visiopass Zenith 01877 00877 00477 00237 00003 00000 00008 01510 01464 01006 01460 00144 00003 00276 01500 01504 00276 00778 01445 01068 01877 00840 00003 00000 01509 00276 00303 00003 00303 00276 00003 00276 00003 00008 00000 00817 00000 00525 00899 Cable PVR Combination x1 gt N A Americast Digeo Freebox General Instrument Jerrold Motorola Pace Pioneer Scientific Atlanta Sony Supercable Time Warner cable Zenith Acoustic Research Advantage Aiwa Arcam Audio Research Audiolab Audiomeca Audioton AVI 00899 01187 01482 00810 00810 01376 00810 01187 01877 00237 01877 00877 01877 00877 01006
62. 10030 10163 11498 10180 10037 10646 10163 10668 10180 10706 10217 10001 10706 10037 10156 11962 10037 10030 10037 10499 10180 10108 10037 10009 10009 10037 10180 10418 10817 10487 10037 10370 10037 10009 10876 10463 10009 10009 10051 10374 PRESET CODE 10093 10463 10070 10036 10418 10508 10653 10683 11923 10264 10817 100577 10217 10180 10217 10008 10264 10817 10264 10361 10370 10606 10778 11556 10060 10362 10370 11037 11037 10030 10371 10455 10556 10668 10180 10765 10362 10370 10556 10610 10150 10053 WBS 10218 10264 10817 10037 10218 10587 10641 11084 10180 10030 10264 10208 10226 10661 10817 10217 10264 10053 10218 10606 10731 10218 10374 10610 10610 10767 10374 10036 10371 10714 Kyoshu Kyoto L amp S Electronic Lark LaSAT Lavis Leader Lecson Legend Lenco Lenoir Lexsor Leyco LG Liesenk amp Tter Liesenkotter Lifetec Lihua Lloyd s Local India TV Local Malaysia TV Lodos Loewe Logik Logix Longjiang Luker Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxor LXI M Electronic Madison MAG Magnadyne Magnafon Magnasonic 10418 10163 10714 10154 10486 11037 10009 10037 10009 10037 10009 11196 10037 10054 10030 11178 10700 10361 10108 1
63. 10672 10092 10180 10009 10374 10163 10037 10163 10374 11080 10264 10145 10037 10009 10037 10706 10698 10037 10037 10872 10820 10037 10880 10009 10587 10668 10394 10009 10009 11164 10698 10009 10037 10394 10217 10017 10217 10463 11034 10037 10093 10217 10037 10451 10092 10672 10876 11909 10374 10170 10036 10035 AT 10486 10037 11207 10009 10178 10036 10661 10208 10217 10208 11178 10511 10587 10037 10009 10820 10668 10037 10780 11704 10820 10217 11037 10180 10180 11463 10180 10178 11661 10634 10700 10860 10880 11755 10623 10556 10264 10218 10109 10108 10009 10036 10037 10714 10715 11207 10030 10092 10037 10374 10548 10371 10672 10860 10217 10872 11556 10343 10352 THES 10178 10070 10178 10171 E Easy Living 11248 10037 10070 10163 10217 Gooding 10487 Hema 10009 10217 Ima 10236 10180 10178 Eaton 10060 l Hewlett Packard 11494 11502 Imperial 10037 10074 10370 10418 UD AAE i RIO 11037 10880 10808 10714 TMLee Get Ten Ecco 10773 Firstar 10236 10009 10668 10661 10634 10625 Hifivox LOWE Imperial 10037 10009 10037 10208 10217 10587 10560 10556 10499 Highline 10037 10264 Edison Minerva 10487 First 10361 10374 10556 10668
64. 10714 10820 10361 10548 10264 10370 11331 11610 10780 10872 10371 10433 10093 10180 10030 10166 10463 10180 10011 10037 10556 10714 11911 10218 10264 10218 10037 10109 10226 10343 10556 10556 10714 10200 10217 10418 10556 10217 10218 10698 10773 11269 11904 10217 10264 10054 10000 10156 10250 Profex 10009 10163 10361 10250 10093 10145 10171 SBR 10037 10556 Simpson 10178 10030 10011 Remotec 10051 10236 10030 11947 mn TORIS 10037 1217 10060 10092 10009 10037 11946 11941 11480 11310 m 10714 Singer WE IST qma Cem Panasonic 11291 11271 10853 10650 Profilo 11556 OTT ne 10361 10374 10486 10548 i 10548 10508 10367 10361 Profitronic 10037 Revox 10037 10606 10714 11191 Sinotec 10773 10226 10208 10163 10108 11 10037 10035 10037 10073 10625 10634 i ee Sinudyne 10037 10163 10361 11037 10037 10264 i Skantic 10163 Panavision 10037 Schneider 10394 10371 10361 10352 10051 10706 10009 10208 Proscan 11447 10047 11347 11922 Rinex 10773 10343 10218 10217 10163 SKY 10037 10880 11504 Panda 10226 10264 10508 10698 Prosco 10156 10009 10037 10218 10264 10070 10037 Sky Brazil 10880 10780 10817 10821 10037 10217 10370 10371 Roadstar 10418 10668 10714 11037 Scotch 10178 Sky North 10037 Pathe Cinema 10163 10374 10668 10714 m E Scotland 10163 a iant 10180 1010
65. 21137 21237 20642 20742 20104 20041 20226 20352 20742 20081 20209 20038 20038 20047 20000 20209 20041 20278 055 20037 20081 20240 20000 20042 20041 20089 20642 20037 20039 20000 20278 20038 20225 20081 20240 20000 20278 20348 20352 20037 20048 20081 20000 20042 20104 20000 20209 20278 20226 20320 20347 Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush Hypson Hytek iBUYPOWER Imperial Ingersol Interbuy Interfunk Internal International Intervision Irradio ITT ITT Nokia ITV Janeil JBL Jensen JMB Joyce JVC Kambrook Karcher KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC Kimari Kneissel Kodak Kolin Kolster KTV Kuba Kuba Electronic Lenco LG Lifetec Linksys Lloyd s Loewe Logik Lumatron Lunatron 20042 20739 21972 20037 2095 20047 2197 2 20000 20240 20037 20081 202 8 20037 20037 20348 20037 20240 20106 20240 20037 20240 20278 20067 20209 20000 20184 20041 20037 20081 20037 20037 20315 20067 20000 20047 20037 20352 20035 20043 20209 20000 20047 20047 20278 20037 20042 20225 20209 21972 20240 21062 21262 20240 20278 ANST 20739 20000 20209 20278 20480 20000 20209 20104 20637 20278 20642 20000 20209 20278 20081 21137 20104 20041 20046 20104 20041 20106 20278
66. 3 DVR 2 4 VCR ZONE4 ZONE 2 HI e n the initial status USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel B8 9 9 OO 60 9 HOT COLD SELE Y PB CB soos PRIA e To change the port to be used see USB Select on page 47 e For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device see page 67 68 e Set to the USB port you want to use Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini Tuner and Home e he AVP A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports one each on the front and rear panels It is not possible to use the set with USB memory Dock connection have been completed devices connected to both the ports at the same time Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select e The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved e XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc All e Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVP A1HDCI s USB port rights reserved Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference 19 HD Radio broadcast HD Radio broadcast is a service that is only available within the United States Antenna terminals An F type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly Direction of broadcasting station AM FM AM
67. 30490 307515919 30690 31051 30699 30789 31421 31923 30730 31020 31730 30672 31004 307 13 AEE 31005 31227 JIH 30751 31115 30627 31061 30831 30841 30713 30872 30699 30833 30869 31483 30695 30571 30730 31730 30672 30675 30788 31233 30713 30730 30852 31086 31321 S92 31233 SIS 30672 30852 31321 30788 30831 30872 30831 30503 30539 30690 30713 30770 31115 31228 31087 30831 30714 30816 30874 31023 Si 12991802 30651 30705 30774 31347 31115 31367 30872 Daewoo Dalton Dansai Dantax Daytek Dayton DCE Decca Denon Denver Denzel Desay Dgtec Diamond Digihome DigiLogic digiRED Digitech Digitor Digitrex DIK Dinamic Disney DiViDo DK Digital DMTech Dragon DreamX DSE Dual Durabrand DVD2000 DVX E max EagleTec eBench ECO Eclipse Elfunk Elin Elite Ellion Elta Eltax Emerson Enterprise 30490 30784 30705 30714 30770 30833 30869 30872 31172 31483 31906 31036 30770730763 311685 30539 30713 30723 30790 30872 31005 30872 30831 30770 31115 30490 30634 31634 32134 30672 30699 30788 30898 31056 31104 31321 31923 30665 30843 31212 30672 30651 30751 30768 30790 30713 30713 30717 31832 30651 30690 30833 31005 31423 30672 31004 31056 30831 30788 30675 30831 31270 30705 30831 30783 31271 30831 31151 50555 5251750
68. 30651 30665 30675 30713 30730 30783 30790 30831 31023 Meal 31023 31002 30521 30768 31233 31321 30714 31152 30730 30723 30751 30713 30850 30884 30770 S1 MES 30850 31421 30672 30690 30770 30788 30550 SOS S1115 S1 51255 31233 31321 30591 30675 30705 30821 31268 30591 Entivo Enzer ESA EuroLine Fenner Ferguson Finlux Firstline Fisher Funai Fusion Gateway GE General Electric Germatic Global Link Global Solutions Global Sphere Go Video GoldStar Goodmans GP Audio GPX Gradiente Graetz Gran Prix Grandin Greenhil Grundig Grunke H amp B Haaz Haier Hanseatic Harman Kardon HCM HDT HE Henss HIMAX Hitachi Hiteker Hoeher 30503 30539 30784 30770 31228 30821 31268 30675 30788 31115 31233 30651 30651 30695 30713 30884 30898 31695 31730 30672 30591 30741 30751 30770 30783 30651 30713 30843 30869 31530 30670 30675 30695 31268 30862 31158 30522 30815 30717 30717 31051 31224 30768 31152 30573 30744 30717 30715 30741 30783 30833 30869 31044 31075 31099 31158 31483 31730 30591 30741 30869 30651 30690 30713 30723 30730 30783 30790 30833 31004 31140 31423 31530 Bell nllo 31140 30699 30741 30490 30651 30665 30831 30898 91299 30717 30539 30651 30551 30670 30686 30695 30705 30713 30775 30790 31004 31036 alo a170 S12 oSA
69. DEv2 mode 74 JJ o O ma 2 EL Display MODE SELECTOR gt 14 4 gt PI 3 lt lt gt gt H E SOURCE ON SOURCE OFF SETUP 7 CH TV VCR EL Display MODE SELECTOR of 24 lt E CH MODE SELECTOR Satellite Receiver Cable TV Device Mode Device operated TV HITACHI TV SONY Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through Power on Power on Power on Power on Power off 45 curso ENTER Enter setting SETUP Setup DISPLAY slay Wa Swich channels 0 940 Channel selection TR Swehmus Simi dt Special Remarks OG Special Remarks D Only one component can be preset for each mode If a new code is preset the previous code is automatically cleared 3 The CD VCR or DVD buttons one only set can be assigned to the TV satellite receiver and cable TV mode I page 77 Punch Through Function MODE SELECTOR Device Mode Device operated Amalogunr _ NET USBB HDRadio Preset memory block selection Tuning Channel selection Tuning BAND AM FM switching AM FM switching MEMO Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Buttons Vdb Cahegysearh Multicast switching A V ENTER Ll _ Enter Playback Pause Pre
70. Digital DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Signals and adjustability in the different modes Parameter default values are shown in parentheses PRO LOGIC Il llx MUSIC mode ee Surround Mode only ES SEM mode only Dynamic Mode Decoder Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer Tone 1 Night Mode Room EO EQ 2 RESTORER I Center Center Subwoofer Panorama Dimension Width Att Channel NOTE6 PURE DIRECT DIRECT x x OFF NOTES O NOTES Ib SD TEE CIE DSD MULTI DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT STEREO EXT IN MULTI CH IN WIDE SCREEN HOME THX CINEMA 2ch HOME THX CINEMA 5 1ch DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx O Cinema DOLBY PRO LOGIC II Cinema DTS NEO 6 O Cinema DOLBY DIGITAL x DTS SURROUND neural 7 STEREO SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO VIDEO GAME MATRIX DOLBY HEADPHONE coc be o Be x Ba x BIO x ES xX ES X ES X O EM x Ba gt Ba gt x x 9 x gt E3 gt Be x Bax Ba x Bax O x Ba x Ba gt E3 gt Bex x Ba x Ba gt E3 gt Ba x x 9 gt gt ES Bax gt gt O Ba O Ba ESO Q NE Tl BEI EN RG n asal O ENS Tl BI an ES Bas Baa Bs eas es ea an an E C eas E c p p O x a x zm aL O m O EL e zm O T O m O a
71. HDMI OPTICAL AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL e When recording to a digital video recorder it is necessary that the OUT Den ed n CUT N b i type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same B R a type that is connected to the AVP A1HDCI DVR 1 OUT connector DOO Example TV IN S Video cable DVR 1 OUT S Video cable TV IN gt Video cable DVR 1 OUT Video cable e Connect DVR 2 in the same way e When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the component video connection of DVR 2 make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVR 1 or DVR 2 Assign Component I page 47 e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP A1HDCI s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL2 e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP A1HDCI s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3 as gt B COMUNI yj v NEZ NEZ roa NEA NEA F ET E O08 EN VAS v sss NL NL NC YS SY QD ise HDP TV CBL SAT VCR Pod DVR 1 AUDIO AC IN vA 9 MADE IN JAPAN SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A MAX 16 Video Cassette Recorder CD Recorder MD Recorder Tape Deck Connect the cables to be used Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals or
72. I page 29 e At the Advanced settings if the Subwoofer Setup I page 29 setting is set to LFE THX GUI menu speakers for which Speaker Configuration is set to Small can be set If set to LFE Main the setting can be made regardless of the speaker size e For speakers set to Small sound below the crossover frequency Is cut from the sound output The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers 4 THX Audio Setup Set the speaker to play the optimal THX surround mode THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Set when using a subwoofer compatible with THX Ultra2 standards or a subwoofer that can be properly played at low range Selectable items Yes these settings when Yes is selected for the subwoofer in the Speaker Configuration settings This option is not available when No is selected 187 page 29 31 BGC Boundary Gain Compensation If bass sound feels big compensate by lowering volume Selectable items OFF e f the bass sound seems too strong Set BGC to ON This activates a filter that gently reduces very deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass response Select ON or OFF according to how strong you prefer the deep bass response to be e his can be set when the THX Ultra2 Subwoofer setting is set to Yes SB Speaker Position Set the distance between the left and right surround back speakers Se
73. If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found when allthe frequencies have been searched NO PROGRAMME is displayed 58 yoeqdeld 20 D lt D x lt SOURCE SELECT gt C JTU DEv1 mode SEARCH CHANNEL TUNER 59 lt STATUS gt AV lt b gt ENTER TU i DEv2 mode e a gt VA s lt SAT TU AMP mode NUMBER About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit TP Search Use this function to find RDS stations broadcastino traffic programs TP stations Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press TUNER AMP mode to select TUNER To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv1 mode Iz amp page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press SEARCH to select TP Press CHANNEL TP search begins automatically X If no TP station is found with the above operation all the reception bands are searched X The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops 5 To continue searching repeat steps 2 to 3 X If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been searched NO PROGRAMME is
74. LINK cable Audio signal Video signal Network connections wired LAN Output Input Output O pE Ethernet cable Output Output Video Conversion Function e This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVP A1HDCI into the format used to output the video signals from the AVP A1HDCI to a monitor e The AVP A1HDCI s video input output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals e 5 5 o c L L J Digital video signals HDMI Analog video signals Component video S Video and Video Flow of video signals inside the AVP A1HDCI MAIN ZONE High picture quality playback ZONE2 High picture quality playback HDMI connector HDMI connector Y PR CR Y PR CR T Component video s lt Component video connectors Z1 connectors LJ S Video connector LJ S Video connector Video connector Video connector Video inputs Video outputs When 4801 5761 signals are input Flow of video signals for ZONE2 Y PR CR Y PR CR Component video Component video connectors connectors S Video connector Video connector Video connector Video outputs Video inputs When 4801 5761 signals are input LL Monitor ZONE
75. Lodos Logik Logix Lorenzen Luxor M Electronic M vision Magnavox Manata Manhattan Marantz Maspro Master s Matsui Maximum Mclntosh MDS Mediabox Mediacom MediaSa Medion Medison Mega Memorex Metronic Metz MiCO Micro Micro Elektronic Micro Technology Micromaxx Microstar Microtec Mitsubishi Morgan s Motorola MTEC Muller 00173 01695 01043 01334 01296 00173 00299 01631 01718 01718 01334 00713 01611 01075 01414 00299 00713 01043 01284 01284 01075 00299 00345 00873 00818 01557 00724 00722 00710 00713 00455 00710 01083 00200 00173 00713 01530 00394 00173 00710 01284 01743 01075 01334 01685 00869 01225 00853 01206 00853 00299 00713 01043 01075 01232 01334 01412 01626 00713 00200 00724 00713 00818 01283 01334 01375 01704 00173 01811 00713 00713 00713 00299 01075 00713 00749 00455 00200 00713 01232 01412 00869 00856 01473 01214 01695 Multibroadcast Multichoice Mx Onda Myryad Mysat MySky NEC NEOTION Netgem Netsat Neuf TV Neuhaus Neuling Neusat Nevir Next Level Nikko Noda Electronic Nokia Nordmende OctalTV Okano Omega Opente Optex Optimus Optus Orbis Orbitech Origo OSAT P Sat Pace Pacific Packard Bell Packsat Palcom Panarex Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat peeKTon 00642 00879 00642 00879 01333 01433 01558 01560 01658
76. M d 41 Digital A ios IU ILL UT 41 E Remote nana Pn nn s 41 2Way AION S 41 Blas a eee ns 42 Setup lock E M T 42 IE EVA CCS TRY nd dera 42 Firmware Update 42 ACO 72 Language Sie oa wus UE M M are Wha NUMEN LR Ne ea Nee 43 Input Source Selection eoo a U SS 43 Settings Related to Playing Input Sources 44 Play ARES CREE eran Pa PP Se an 44 Auto Preset EES AEREE ois EEEE sips 44 Preset Skip EE RU CUR Rae 44 n Preset Name e e Y n xe RU 44 C Ce A uM IL 44 45 n Input W eQ es 45 46 RENAME eee CU s aa sisqa ss ms SUME SE YES TEE PRENE 46 EH Source keveler enre Sun S E dfe REE 46 Elo ae 46 Playback Mode iPod emm 46 Ie 46 47 Playback MOO aga 27 Stil Vv RR Ux E ct fe eint 47 Antenna Aiming Enc ed tene rU PES CAM ee eel ee ee Ay Surround Mode HOME THX CINEMA 48 Surround Playback Of 2 chiannel SOUPCES 48 Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc 48 S
77. MODE SELECTOR for the component to be operated The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes 2 Operate the component NUMBER X For details refer to the component s operating instructions RC SETUP 2 Operate the component X For details refer to the component s operating instructions 4 Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment HOME is used to return to the AMP mode AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 some buttons may not operate ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL when in any mode other than AMP NOTE The device mode DEV1 cannot be changed while the setting is being made 73 Functions of Buttons by Component EL Display MODESELECTOR DD VCR iPod MODE 2 x SELECTOR i d 3 D d aed DVD Record CD Record TAPE decere J aa evice operate Default setting eae m end 4 4 gt gt I IJ Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Pause as Ii Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search SOURCEON cue cue cue cue cue cue cue n SOURCE OFF Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search NI ss tt S SSE ORNARE sassa fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse
78. R5 Select the connector input to be used for each channel Selectable items XLR OFF 21 Power Amp Select the setup channel Selectable items L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 R5 R1 R2 R3 R4 Set the power amp usage for each channel Selectable items NORMAL BI AMP BRIDGE BTL LINK Check Check CONTROL LINK El Volume Control Set the MAIN ZONE volume setting Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume Selectable items OFF 20dB 10dB 04 Power On Level his sets the volume set when the MAIN ZONE s power is turned on Selectable items dB 80dB 18dB Mute Level This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the MAIN ZONE Selectable items Full 40dB 20dB Source Delete Remove input sources that are not used from the display Selectable items Delete e Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted e nput sources set to Delete cannot be selected from GUI menu Source Select or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit fi GUI Make GUI related settings Screensaver Make screensaver settings Use the screensaver to prevent burn in on the monitor screen When set to ON the screensaver is activated if there is no activity for about 3 minutes Selectable items OFF Wall Paper Change the GUI background Selectable items
79. Subwoofer setting at Speaker configuration is set to No e The subwoofer is not properly connected e The subwoofer s turned off e Surround mode set to STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround or HOME THX CINEMA mode volume is e DVD player s audio output setting Is not set to bitstream eDVD player is not compatible with DTS sound playback AVP A1HDCl s Decode Mode setting is set to e Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio setting is set to TAE e The mode is set to something other than STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround or HOME THX CINEMA eSet to a surround playback mode eSet to something other than None e Select mode e Turn on the subwoofer s power surround playback e Set to Yes e Check the connections e Adjust the subwoofer s volume to an appropriate level e Set to the STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround or HOME THX CINEMA mode e Set the DVD player For details refer to the DVD player s operating instructions e Use a DIS compatible player e Set to the Auto or mode e Set Amp Symptom No sound is output from the monitor connected with HDMI connections Video eThe Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio setting is set to e Set to TV Symptom The on screen display does not appear No picture appears No picture appears with HDMI connectio
80. The selected Internet radio station is cleared To cancel the operation without clearing the station press P gt 66 v tb lt c C NET DTU a AVD ENTER B DEv1 mode AV Main remote control unit Sub remote control unit 67 About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Playing Files Stored on a Computer Use this procedure to play music files image files or playlists Use A V to select Media Server then press ENTER or gt Use V to select the host name of the computer on which the music file you want to play is located then press ENTER or gt Use A V to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or b Use A V to select the file then press ENTER or P Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 Selecting tracks During playback either press A previous track or V next track e When playing still picture JPEG files files can also be selected using the operation described below During playback either press A previous file or V next file e Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files I page 21 e Before starting you must launch the computer s server software and set the files as server con
81. VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 X 480p 720p Q Q X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO X 4801 5761 O O X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 Q x x x HDMI 2 x x x HDMI 3 x x X O x x HDMI 2 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 HDMI 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Q X Q X HDMI 2 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 HDMI 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO O x O O HDMI 2 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 HDMI 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO O 1080p x x HDMI 2 COMPONENT x x HDMI 3 COMPONENT x X O O 480p 720p X X HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 x x HDMI 3 COMPONENT x x O 4801 5761 x X HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT ON With HDMI Q 1080p X Q HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 55 HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO monitor O O 480p 720p X HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 X VIDEO HDMI 3 COMPONENT x VIDEO O 4801 5761 x HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT O 1080p O X HDMI 2 COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO Q O 480p 720p X HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO HDMI 3 COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO O 4801 5761 O x HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT O 1080p O O HDMI 2 COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 H
82. a network key used for WPA The encryption algorithm is RCA the same as for WEP but the security level is increased by changing the network key used for encryption for each packet AES Advanced Encryption Standard This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future It uses the Rijndael algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block It supports data lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits as well offering extremely high encryption security 95 Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output e The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats NTSC PAL SECAM NTSCA 43 PAL N PAL M and PAL 60 e When SECAM signals of video input are up converted the signals are output PAL format from the S Video connector e f the input signal is a component 1080p signal up converting to HDMI is not possible e The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal computer s resolution e g VGA are input 1 MAIN ZONE Vida
83. asr 24 D Cursor buttons 4 D me 24 D Parameter Search button PARA 50 58 60 63 D Monitor select M SEL HOME 32 73 B Channel buttons 57 62 74 Input source select Number buttons mee 43 56 D Remote control signal transmitter 4 D Device select indicators DEV1 DEV2 73 ZONE3 ZONE4 select indicators 23 1 74 adde 83 D RESTORER button 53 D Night button NGT ee 53 Test tone button TEST 30 Surround speaker select button SPKR 31 POWER buttons Ree 56 Channel select CH SEL ENTER button a s 24 72 Return button RTN 24 Master volume control buttons VOL 56 Muting button MUTE e 56 83 Main remote control unit setup button RC SETUP ettet te ott asenn 73 The time for which the backlight stays on be changed I page 78 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT 1 3 A DL RSTR NGT INPUT SPKR TEST and surround mode buttons cannot be used _1 Sub remote control unit RC 1070 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 ALL MUSIC USB FAVORITES DENON RC 1070 REPEAT RANDOM
84. be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode e When Dynamic EQ is set to ON you cannot use the Tone setting I page 90 Room EQ Select room equalizer for current environment Selectable items Audyssey Optimize frequency response of all speakers Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers Audyssey Byp L R Audyssey Flat Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response Manual Apply frequency response set with Manual EQ IS page 34 Turn equalizer off Operating from the main unit main remote control unit Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the main remote control OFF gt Audyssey Audyssey L R Manual Audyssey Flat NI When Audyssey is selected lights When Audyssey Byp L R or Audyssey Flat is selected or when the auto setup measuring results have changed NUPYSSEY lights o3 e Audyssey L R and Audyssey Flat can be selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed e f the settings of the speakers for which None has been determined at Auto Setup are changed Audyssey Audyssey Byp L R and Audyssey Flat cannot be selected and measurements have to be taken again to include the newly added speakers e When using headphones
85. but they cannot be played on the AVP A1HDCI L Others elf you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Iz amp page 35 36 e With the AVP A1HDCI it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically e When using a broadband router DHCP function the AVP A1HDCI sets the IP address etc automatically When using the AVP A1HDCI connected to a network with no DHCP function make the settings for the IP address etc at GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup I page 35 36 AVP A1HDCI is not compatible with PPPoE A PPPoE compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set e Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract it may be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet make the proxy server settings on the AVP A1HDCI in the same way ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre out Connections e f another power amplifier or pre main integrated amplifier is connected the ZONE2 or ZONES pre out variable or fixed level connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONES the same time IGS page 82 83 e o the monitor output of ZONE2 various formats of video signals input by the video con
86. com for the current list of channels For information on receiving this channel visit www xmradio com or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1 800 967 2346 Consult the latest channel guide at www xmradio com for the current list of channels For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not received XM s signal for an extended period allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again Specifications Audio section e Analog Input sensitivity Input impedance Frequency response S N Distortion Rated output Digital D A output Digital input RCA Pre output unbalanced 200 mV 47 kO kohms XLR Pre output balanced 400 mV 100 kO kohms 10 Hz 100 kHz 1 3 dB DIRECT mode 102 dB IHF A weighted DIRECT mode 0 005 20 Hz 20 kHz DIRECT mode RCA Pre output unbalanced 1 2 V XLR Pre output balanced 2 4 V Rated output 2 V at O dB playback Total harmonic distortion 0 005 96 1 kHz at O dB Dynamic range 110 dB Format Digital audio interface e Phono equalizer PHONO input REC OUT Input sensitivity RIAA deviation S N Rated output Distortion factor L Video section e Standard video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response e S Video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response e Color component video connector Input
87. digital connections if you wish to record digital audio signals depending on the types of connectors on the components being used Video cassette recorder VIDEO CD recorder MD recorder Tape deck AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO S VIDEO IN AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL AUDIO IN AUDIO OPTICAL AUDIO AUDIO OPTICAL 5 5 o 1 ia DTU ANTENNA durs E 2 V 250 Sg 1 6 DVR 2 SELECTABLE mmm DTU AN A AS I Hr ad OPTICAL Z fe f a e iss 2 DVR 1 1 TV CBL a 3 SAT 4 0 2 E BR Ba 3 DVR 2 4 R 2 4 VCR ZONE4 ZONE 2 io q DENONL SN NEZ NEL wy 1 DVD 2 HDP 3 5 4 CD Mwy 1 TV CBL 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE EN VEN ZZ A f Y ETAN PB CB PR CR S VIDEO DOG o o o o o i o 9 o o ulis VIDEO i is is AEN o o e oye 0 us i M 8 9 m lll ake EE TV CBL SAT VCR iPod d MAN 2D AEN
88. displayed RT Radio Text RT appears on the display when radio text data is received Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press TUNER AMP mode to select TUNER To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv1 mode Iz amp page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press SEARCH to select RT X While receiving an RDS broadcast station the text data broadcast from the station is displayed X To turn the display off press lt Pb X If no text data is being broadcast NO TEXT DATA is displayed Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs ABOUT XM RADIO XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial free music plus the best in premier sports news talk radio stand up comedy children s and entertainment programming XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast From rock to reggae from classical to hip hop XM has something for every music fan For U S customers information about XM Radio is available online at www xmradio com For Canadian customers information about XM Canada Is online at www xmradio ca XM READY LEGAL XM monthly service subscription sold separately XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock required each sold separately to receive XM service Installation costs and other fees and taxes including a one time activation fee may apply All fees and programming subject to change Channels with frequent
89. establishing simple temporary networks Network Names SSID Security Set Identifier When forming wireless LAN networks groups are formed to prevent interference data theft etc This grouping is done by SSID or Security Set Identifiers For further security a WEP key is set and signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match WEP Key Network Key This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer On the AVP A1HDCI the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them 94 l 5 WPA Wi Fi Protected Access This is a security standard established by the Wi Fi Alliance In addition to the conventional SSID network name and WEP key network key it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi Fi Alliance compatible with more secure AES encryption WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Pre shared Key This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client Passphrase This refers to the code key used for WPA PSK WPA2 PSK authentication a WPA authentication method TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol This is
90. explicit language are indicated with an XL Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1 800 XMRADIO US residents and 1 877 GETXMSR Canadian residents For a full listing of the XM commercial free channels and advertisingsupported channels visit lineup xmradio com US residents or xmradio ca Canadian residents Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio com US residents and xmradio ca Canadian residents Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada 2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved All other trademarks are the property of their respective Owners XM READY SUBSCRIPTIONS Once you have installed the XM Mini Tuner Dock inserted the XM Mini Tuner connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready home audio system and installed the antenna you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID On the XM Mini Tuner on the XM Mini Tuner package and on XM Channel Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference LI LUI LI LI L Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters I S or F Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U S online at http activate xmradio com or call 1 800 XM RADIO 1 800 967 2346 Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https activate xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 1 877 438 9677 You
91. for individual users so you must provide your MAC or e mail address Exclusive URL http Awww radiodenon com X The radio station database service may be suspended without notice e The AVP A1HDCI s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service vTuner This database service provides list edited and created for the AVP A1HDCI _J Media server This function lets you play music files and playlists m3u wpl stored on a computer media server connected to the AVP A1HDCI via a network With the AVP A1HDCIs network audio playback function connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service Windows Media DRM10 Album art function When a WMA Windows Media Audio MP3 or MPEG 4 AAC file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing For music files in WMA Windows Media Audio format the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver 11 Slide show function Still picture JPEG files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture is displayed can be set When still picture JPEG files played the AVP A1HDCI they are played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play Installing Windows Media Player ver 11 D If
92. indicator flashes twice Press the button you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Resetting by device mode Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice System call function Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice 3 Press SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Punch through function Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset TV or SAT CBL Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice All settings Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 1 in that order The
93. information on HD Radio technology please go to www ibiquity com HD Radio HD Radio Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Basic Operation Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press DTU AMP mode to select HD Radio GUI Source Select 1257 page 43 To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the NET DTU pEv2 mode I page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press BAND to select FM or AM 4 Tune in the desired broadcast station DTo tune in automatically Auto Tuning Press MODE to select HD Auto or Auto then use A V to select the station you want to hear e HD indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station is tuned in e When HD Auto tuning mode is selected only HD Radio stations are tuned in e f Auto tuning mode is selected both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in 2 To tune in manually Manual Tuning Press MODE to select Manual then use A V t is also possible to switch to FM or AM at step 1 by pressing DTU e f the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning tune it in manually e When tuning in stations manually press and hold V to change frequencies continuously e HD Radio stations can be pre
94. input mode and decode mode settings for this source The selectable input modes depend on the input source and Assign setting IG page 46 47 Input Mode Set the input mode for this source TUNER PHONO Selectable items EXT IN NET USB HD Radio Selectable items EXT IN Input source iPod ww Input source Input source CD DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items HDMI Digital Analog EXT IN When digital signal is properly input the DiG indicator lights on the display If the piG indicator does not light check the digital input connector assignment and the connections Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on the main remote control unit EN Auto HDMI Digital EE EXT IN Analog 1 This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to HDMI 187 46 Excluding CD and TUNER 2 This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to Digital I page 46 Decode Mode Set the decode mode for this source Input source CD DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR
95. instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product CAUTION e o comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons e his product and its antenna must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Con
96. is displayed in the XM mode OFF AIR is displayed in the XM mode UP DATING is displayed in the XM mode XM is displayed in the XM mode 103 e The XM Mini Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions Note that the AVP ATHDCI may not respond to some buttons for XM while this message is displayed eThe XM Mini Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal Something may be blocking the XM antenna s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed e You selected an XM channel is not currently broadcasting e You selected an XM channel that is blocked or cannot be receive with your XM subscription package e selected channel is not available The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number This message may occur initially with a new radio or a radio that has not received XM s signal for an extended period e his message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions If you see this message often reposition the XM antenna for better signal reception Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception See instructions supplied with the XM Mini Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information Check back later in the mean time select another channel Consult the latest channel guide at www xmradio
97. is connected using the control link POA A1HDCI is updated simultaneously with update of AVP A1HDCI Check for Update You can check for firmware updates You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update Start Execute the update process When updating starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed during the update process When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X f the display reads as shown below check the settings and network environment then update again Display Updating failed Login failed Description Updating failed Failure to log into server Server is busy Wait a while then try again Failure connecting to server Server is busy Connection fail to the AVP A1HDCI and upgrade When you purchase a new function and register your user information Registerd is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the upgrade Upon completion of the upgrade you can start using the new function Upgrade Execute the upgrade process When upgrading starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed during the upgrade process When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X f the upgrade is not successf
98. left or right so Input to both channels e Press the DSP SIMULATION button on the main unit or SIMU button on the main remote control unit to switch the surround mode The mode switches each time the button is pressed e Depending on the program source being played it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect In this case try other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes Stereo Playback Selectable items STEREO This is the mode for playing in stereo The tone can be adjusted Sound 15 output from the front left and right soeakers and subwoofer When the main unit s DIRECT STEREO button or the main remote control unit s D ST button is pressed DIRECT mode can be switched to STEREO mode Direct Playback Selectable items DIRECT In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal For multi channel sources the display depends on the surround back output s play mode input signal Display Analog signal PCM 2ch Dolby Digital source DTS source Other 2 channel digital signals M DIRECT 71 DSD multi ch DSD MULTI DIRECT When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings DIRECT or MULTI CH DIRECT is displayed For details see 92 DIRECT PCM multi ch
99. loop antenna large for HD Radio broadcasting supplied Direction of broadcasting station FM antenna e To prevent interference install at least 3 3 feet S 1 m away from the antenna connected to the E AM loop antenna FM antenna AVP A1HDCI s other AM tuner terminal small supplied 3 75 O ohms Coaxial cable SAT TU ANTENNA XM 75 O ohms Coaxial cable 4 VCR COAXIAL HDP FM indoor antenna dipole for HD Radio broadcasting supplied FM indoor antenna KIND supplied MADE IN JAPAN e AM outdoor antenna Ground AM outdoor antenna Ground 1 Push the 2 Insert the 3 Return the Note to CATV system installer AM loop antenna assembly lever conducta aus This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer s attention to Article 820 40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding EN c and in particular specifies that the cable ground gt e Remove the vinyl tie and take Bend in the reverse direction e building as close to the point of cable entry connection line as practical eDo connect two FM antennas a With the antenna on top of b With the antenna attached simultaneously any stable surface to a wall e Even if an exte
100. of the Microsoft group of companies e The PlaysForSure logo Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device WM DRM to protect the integrity of their content Secure Content so that their intellectual property including copyright in such content is not misappropriated This device uses WM DRM software to play Secure Content WM DRM Software If the security of the WM DRM Software in this device has been compromised owners of Secure Content Secure Content Owners may request that Microsoft revoke the WM DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy display and or play Secure Content Revocation does not alter the WM DRM Software s ability to play unprotected content A list of revoked WM DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC Microsoft may in conjunction with such license also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners About WirelessLAN A 5 About Wireless LAN Wi Fi Wi Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices IEEE 802 11b This is one wireless LAN st
101. operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection ZONEOFF Power turned off 2X1 Power turned off 1 Power turned off 3X1 Power turned on 81 Power turned on 1 Input source selection X2 Input source selection Input source selection E Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel memory block selection VOLUME Adjustment of volume X1 Adjustment of volume X1 MUTE Muting 1 Muting 1 MENU SSelectedzonemenu Selectedzonemenu A x 4 _ Multicast switching A V SEARCH RDS search Multicast switching Tunin Tunin TUNING Y I ws 0 es 1 MUSE KA KA X4 Media server only FAVORTE S 9X 23 J 3X1 Affects the currently selected zone 3X2 In ZONEA it is not possible to select XM HD Radio or sources with no digital input signals TUNER PHONO iPod etc Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB can be played as long as they are not copyright protected X3 The input source switches to NET USB and the files on the USB memory device are played X4 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in All Music on the media server are played X5 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting IGS page 47 DIRECT PL
102. program source To select these surround modes pressing the STANDARD button on the main unit or press the STD button on the main remote control unit The mode switches each time the button is pressed Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources CQ When using a surround back speaker Selectable items DOLBY PLIIx DTS NEO 6 neural LI When not using a surround back speaker Selectable items DOLBYPLII DTS NEO 6 neural DOLBY PLIIx signals are decoded in DOLBY PLIIx or or DOLBY PLII DOLBY PLII for playback Cinema This mode is suited for movie sources Music This mode is suited for music sources Game This mode is suited for games Pro Logic This is the Pro Logic playback mode This can be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLII decoder When this mode is selected DOLBY PL is displayed Operating from the main unit The Cinema Music or Game modes can be directly selected with the CINEMA MUSIC or GAME button on the main unit DTS NEO 6 The signals are decoded in DTS NEO 6 for playback Cinema This mode is suited for movie sources Music This mode is suited for music sources Shh Operating from the main unit The Cinema or Music modes can be directly selected with the CINEMA button or MUSIC button on the main unit neural It is possible to play analog input signals and PCM 2 channel 48kHz or less in the surround mode This is the optimum mode for playing sources
103. resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu Information HDMI Information Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 and set accordingly IGS page 55 connections with or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized HDMI Control Make settings for HDMI control function Control Set HDMI control function to ON OFF Selectable items ON Control Monitor Select the interlocking monitor through the HDMI controls Selectable items Monitor2 d This be set when Control is set to ON Power Off Control Interlock with the power off function through the HDMI controls Selectable items OFF D e This can be set when Control is set to ON e Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings e When the Control setting has been changed always turn off the power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on e he HDMI control function does not work when the power to the equipment is off e For details see HDMI Control Function I page 70 32 Audio Setup Make settings for audio playback Menu tree Manual Setup Audio Setup EXT IN Setup 2ch Direct Stereo Downmix Option Auto Surround Mode Manual EO l EXT IN Setup Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external input connectors EXT IN Mode Select playback mode Selectable items Analog Surrou
104. search by artist name album name or track name 3 Enter the characters then press ENTER Search From the Rhapsody Internet Radio Station Use A V to select Rhapsody Channels then press ENTER or b 2 Use A V to select radio station then press ENTER or P Registering Tracks in My Library Press while the track you wish to register is playing Use AV to select Add to My Library then press ENTER The track is entered in the Library L Listening to Tracks Registered In My Library Use AV to select My Library then press ENTER Use A V to select the information or track then press ENTER After selecting the information is displayed Displaying the Track Menu During Play 1 Press during playback Use A V to select the search item then press ENTER Operating the AVP A1HDCI yoeqdeld Using a Browser Web control This function lets you operate the AVP A1HDCI using Internet Explorer 1 Check the AVP A1HDCT s IP address GUI Manual Setup Network Setup Network Information 1257 page 37 Input the AVP AIHDCI s IP address in Internet Explorer Example http 192 168 x x The x is digits he AVP A1HDCI can be operated in the same way as with regular Internet browsing To use the web control function set the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Other Power Saving setting to OFF I page 37 68 v tb lt c
105. select XM HD Radio or s Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB can X3 The input source switches to NET USB and the files on the X4 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in All Input source selection X2 Input source selection Preset channel selection Adjustment of volume 1 Adjustment of volume G1 Minn Page forward screen Browse Remote mode switching press and hold File operations File operations Track search Track search ER EM x Sp Stop ES EN MSN Page forward screen Character search Play pause Play pause 1 track all track repeat play USB Media server Random play USB Media server Song album shuffle play X3 X 1 track all track repeat play ources with no digital input signals TUNER PHONO iPod etc be played as long as they are not copyright protected USB memory device are played Music on the media server are played X5 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting 87 page 47 J o O gt ma 2 JJ o O ma 2 m Multi zone indicator G ZONE SELECT ZONE OFF zol ADVANCED SETUP ZONE OFF Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Cont
106. taken are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system interacts with the room The time required for this analysis depends the number of speakers connected The higher the number of speakers the longer the time required for analysis STEP4 Check Once the auto setup procedure is complete a measuring result check screen appears Select any item whose results you want to check to review the results Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for speakers with built in filters subwoofers etc This is because filters add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated STEP5 Store The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVP A1HDCI NOTE Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored Error Messages If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation the measuring environment etc an error message 15 displayed If this happens check the relevant items be sure to take the necessary measures then perform the auto setup procedure over again Error messages examples Cause Measures No microphone or speaker Included setup microphone is not connected e Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit e Not all speakers could be detected e Check the speaker connections e The front L speaker was not properly detected Ambient noise is too high much no
107. the original sound before compression It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to HD Radio or NET USB or when analog signals including AM FM signals or PCM signals fs 44 1 48 KHz are input 3 Night Mode Optimized setting for late night listening Selectable items OFF Low Middle High Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Press the NIGHT button on the main unit or the NGT button on the main remote control unit The indicator lights when Low Middle or High is selected 7 OFF Low Middle High _ Audio Delay Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio Delay audio This sets the delay time for audio signals Variable range Oms 200ms Operating from the main unit or the main remote control unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when carrying out this setting 1 Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or A DL button on the main remote control unit 2 Use the lt gt button to set This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT IN when in analog mode DIRECT or STEREO mode with Crossover Frequency set to FIXED THX Front set to Large Tone Defeat to ON and Room EQ to OFF e The adjustment range is 0 to 1
108. the front panel s USB port will be used e Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the file to be displayed Selecting tracks During playback either press A previous track or V next track e When playing still picture JPEG files tracks can also be selected using the operation described below During playback either press A previous file or Y next file e f the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions only the top partition can be selected e The AVP A1HDCI is compatible with files conforming to MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 standards e When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device e The AVP A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports one each on the front and rear panels It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time Select the USB port you want to use at the Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select menu e DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVP A1HDCI e USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub e DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter we recom
109. tuner for TUNER DEv1 the XM remote ID for bEva Learning Function If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVP A1HDCI s main remote control unit Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to set Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 5 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning mode is set Press the button to be set The main remote control unit s display turns off X Ifa button that cannot be learned is pressed the signal transmission indicator lights but the signal is not learned 5 Point the main remote control units directly at each other and press and hold the button on the other device s remote control unit that you want to learn Once learning is completed normally the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice Other device s remote control unit lt s S lt AMP A1HDCI s main remote control unit RC 1067 X f want to learn other buttons repeat steps 4 and 5 The mode can be switched by pressing MODE SELECTOR X The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if learning was not possible Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The sign
110. unit when it is in use Moving the unit Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet Next disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit e Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes e Light Emitting Diodes LED are used in the AVP A1HDCI circuit When powered on a green light shows inside part of the AVP A1HDCI however this is not a fault Cautions on Installation Note For proper heat dispersal do not install this unit in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar enclosure About the Remote Control Unit In addition to the AVP A1HDCI the included main remote control unit RC 1067 can also be used to operate the equipment listed below D DENON system components 2 Non DENON system components e By setting the preset memory I page 73 75 e By using the learn function I page 76 Inserting the Batteries D Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid RC 1067 RC 1070 2 Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment RC 1067 RC 1070 3 Put the rear cover back on e Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit e The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation e When inserting the batte
111. will need a major credit card XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done Basic Operation Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press SAT TU AMP mode to select XM GUI Source Select page 43 To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv2 mode Is page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations Use V to select the station When the station is tuned in the name of the track and artist are displayed The channel switches continuously when A V is pressed and held e XM Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for FM AM stations I page 57 58 Presetting Radio Stations Preset Memory and Listening to Preset Stations e The artist name track name category and reception level can be checked by pressing lt STATUS gt e The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI Tuner I page 40 Press STATUS until SIGNAL appears on the Searching Categories 1 Press lt gt Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press SAT TU
112. x o o 9 _ comPonenn O svoo x O O oO oO COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO gt VIDEO VIDEO i lt x x X x VIDEO SVIDEO x x e O COMPONENT x O Ie eee 5 5 lt COMPONENT S VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO Output present X No output Superimposed over video signal Q Q T lt lt i I lt To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor output with a resolution of 480p 576p ZONE2 Monitor output Input signal Video Convert COMPONENT S VIDEO x O VIDEO SVIDEO O S VIDEO O S VIDEO O 480p 720p x x IO x COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT Output present X No output O x x O O 2 2 O x IX x JOJO OO O JO OO OO 2 2 1 x x x N O O X X Q COMPONENT Q VIDEO Q VIDEO Q COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDE S VIDE S VIDEO OJOJO JOJO S O OO O S 1 With On screen display the VIDEO signal is superimposed output 2 With On screen display the S VIDEO signal is superimposed output COMPONENT When you operate the MENU button on screen display is displayed 97 L ZONE3
113. 0 20067 20038 21035 20042 20000 20209 20035 20081 20000 20038 20226 20479 20042 20046 20104 20348 20226 20037 20000 21262 20104 20278 20742 20742 20348 20000 20616 21262 20047 20042 AEST 20209 Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Polk Audio Portland Presidian Prinz Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosco Prosonic Protec Protech ProVision Pulsar Pulser Pye Qisheng Quarter Quartz Quasar Quelle Radialva Radiola Radionette RadioShack Radix Randex Rank Rank Arena RCA Realistic Reoc ReplayTV Rex Ricavision Rio Roadstar Runco Saba Saisho Salora 20035 20162 20045 20000 20616 20618 21181 20278 20081 20037 20162 20081 20081 20278 20637 21593 20000 20081 20240 20000 20278 20060 21060 20278 20209 20278 20000 20081 20278 20039 20240 20240 20081 20000 20060 20046 20035 20047 20035 20162 20226 21035 20081 20037 20048 20081 20037 21137 20035 20162 20047 20240 20046 21162 20037 20037 20041 20041 20060 20035 20045 20000 20226 20320 21035 21060 20035 20162 20047 20240 20121720278 20348 20614 20616 20041 21082 21137 20037 20081 20038 20742 20039 20041 20278 20209 20348 20104 20043 20048 20081 220209270270 2220 99270 08 20042 20067 20320 20642 20278 20046 21162 20081 20046 21162
114. 0 20081 20037 20240 20035 20037 11 PRESET CODE 31462 20240 20000 20278 20048 20039 20047 20121 20209 20479 20240 20000 20348 20642 20032 20000 20209 20348 20352 20479 21137 20240 20041 20106 20348 20352 20642 20000 20209 20278 20348 20352 221197 20081 20278 20037 20240 20278 20480 20228 21102 21562 20081 20240 20081 20000 20038 Audiolab Audiosonic Audiovox Avis AVP Awa Baird Basic Line Beaumark Beko Bell amp Howell Bestar Black Diamond Black Panther Blaupunkt Blue Sky BPL Brandt Brandt Electronique Brinkmann Broksonic Bush Calix Candle Canon Capehart Carena Carrefour Carrera Carver Casio Cathay CCE CGE Changhong Cimline Cineral CineVision Citizen Classic Clatronic Colortyme Colt Combitech Condor Craig Criterion 20081 20278 20037 20278 20038 20000 20000 20352 20037 20043 20278 20000 20104 20041 20046 20106 20104 20278 20046 20240 20104 20035 20048 20039 20104 20046 20479 20278 20642 20278 20162 20081 20226 20037 20209 20278 20352 20480 20642 20046 20041 20320 20041 20209 20348 20184 20121 20209 20348 20479 21479 20081 20000 20209 20315 20348 20352 20742 20037 20037 20038 20035 20002 20081 20209 20045 20240 20035 20081 20000 20278 20278 20000
115. 00 ms when the Auto Lipsync Correction function is activated Picture Adjust Adjust the picture quality Menu tree Parameter Picture Adjust Contrast Brightness Chroma Level El Hue DNR O Enhancer Sharpness El Contrast Adjust picture contrast Variable range 6 0 6 Brightness Adjust picture brightness Variable rangel 0 12 Chroma Level Adjust picture chroma level saturation Variable range 6 o 6 Hue Adjust color hue Variable range 6 6 DNR Reduces the overall level of noise on the picture Selectable items Low Middle High fi Enhancer Emphasize picture contours Variable rangel 0 12 Sharpness Adjust color definition Variable range 6 o 6 e When the input signal is 1080 the Picture Adjust setting will be ineffective e Adjusting the Contrast Brightness Chroma Level and Hue settings does not affect the HDMI input signal e Hue can be adjusted for composite video and S Video signals e The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources e DNR Enhancer and Sharpness are each effective with HDMI output However they are ineffective with 4801 5 761 output Information Status Shows information about current settings NU S R e MAIN ZONE ZONE2 3 4 El MAIN ZONE Shows information about settings for MAIN ZO
116. 00276 01877 00899 CD Player 40420 40032 40157 40157 40157 40157 40157 40157 40157 G TI Balanced Audio Technology Burmester Bush Cairn California Audio Labs Cambridge Cambridge Audio Cambridge Soundworks Carver CDC CEG Copland Curtis Mathes Cyrus Denon DKK DMX Electronics Dual Dynaco Dynamic Bass Fisher Garrard Genexxa Goldmund Grundig Hafler Harman Kardon Hitachi Inke Integra Jerrold JVC Kenwood KLH Krell Linn Loewe Luxman LXI Magnavox Marantz Matsui MCS Memorex Meridian Micromega Miro Mission 40157 40420 40388 40157 40029 40303 40157 40157 40157 40157 40179 40420 40420 40393 40032 40157 40873 40003 40766 42867 42868 40000 40157 40003 40157 40179 40000 40179 40393 40420 40000 40032 40037 40179 40157 40157 40173 40100 40157 40173 40032 40157 40101 40003 40032 40072 40681 40000 40029 40157 40028 40037 40036 40190 41318 40157 40157 40157 40393 40179 40157 40029 40157 40157 40029 40000 40032 40179 40420 40468 40157 40157 40000 40157 Modulaire MTC Musical Fidelity Myryad NAD Naim NSM Onkyo Optimus Orion Panasonic Parasound Penney Philips Pioneer Polk Audio Proceed Proton QED Quad Quasar Radiola RadioShack RCA Realistic Restek Revox Roksan Rotel Royal SAE Saisho Sansui Sanyo SAST Sears Sharp Siemens Silsonic Sima
117. 0037 10037 10009 10668 iis 10817 10236 10009 10009 10698 11037 10037 10790 10236 10009 10773 10668 10264 11982 10009 11037 10037 10264 10009 10163 10361 11037 10047 10000 10060 10171 10035 10009 10195 10346 10634 10037 11498 10054 10073 10054 10030 10217 10808 10374 10264 11265 11758 10856 10698 10217 10037 10327 10037 10683 10180 11904 10208 10370 10180 10011 10880 10817 10163 10073 10361 10037 10208 10480 11163 10054 10156 10053 10166 10001 10037 10217 10374 10661 10163 10000 10092 10865 10587 10602 10556 10208 10714 10109 10060 11637 10715 10556 10163 10009 10218 10714 10030 10512 10060 10371 11037 10362 10163 10217 10548 10017 10051 10178 10037 10109 10287 10480 10156 10178 11191 10714 10370 10109 10001 10374 1057 10001 10633 10001 10636 11217 10374 1021 10346 10631 10154 10093 10030 10036 10163 10343 10512 10093 Magnavox Magnum Majestic Mandor Manesth Manhattan Marantz Mark Master s Mastro Masuda Matsui Matsushita Maxdorf Maxent Maxim MCE Meck Mediator Medion Megapower Megas Megatron MEI Meile Memorex Memphis Mercury Mermai
118. 00847 00853 01524 01558 01640 00887 00869 00772 00869 00713 00200 01847 01848 00125 00713 00820 00853 00879 01159 01284 01300 01408 01626 00123 01300 00713 00642 00887 01455 01334 T Tantec Tarbs Tatung TBoston Teac Tecatel TechniSat Technomate Technosonic Technotrend Techwood Tele System Electronic Teleciel TeleClub Telefunken Teleka Telestar Telesystem Televes Televisa Telewire Tevion Thomson Thorn Tiny Tioko Tivo Tokai Tonna Topfield Toshiba TPS Triax Trio TT micro Turnsat Twinner UEC UltimateTV Uniden Unisat United Universum US Digital USDTV 00455 01225 00455 01659 01225 01227 01251 01622 01200 00262 00455 00863 01099 01283 01610 01672 01429 01284 01626 01251 01409 01611 01801 01043 01367 00710 00262 00442 01099 01100 01251 01334 01610 01626 01801 00455 01214 01300 01334 00887 01232 00713 01409 01622 01672 00392 00566 00455 00710 00713 00820 00847 00853 01046 01175 01291 01534 01543 01662 00455 01672 00394 01142 01442 00200 00455 00713 01611 01206 01208 01545 01783 00749 01749 00790 00819 00455 01285 01501 01516 01530 00820 01253 01307 00200 00713 00853 01113 01227 01251 01291 01 296 01626 01075 01429 00713 00713 01611 00879 01162 01333 01356 01392 01640 00724 00722 00200 01251
119. 0226 20347 20836 21162 21262 21562 20060 20240 20043 20240 20348 20209 21972 20240 20000 21972 20042 20060 20048 20047 20081 20000 20042 20067 20043 20041 20480 20642 20807 20035 20048 20240 20000 20000 20037 20039 20000 20000 20081 20240 20104 20348 20642 20039 20226 Nebula Electronics NEC Neckermann Nesco Neufunk Newave Nikkai Nikko Nikkodo Nishi Niveus Media Noblex Nokia Nordmende Northgate Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Olympus Onimax Onkyo Optimus Orion Orson Osaki Otake Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Pathe Cinema Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco 20033 20035 20037 20048 20104 20067 20041 20278 20038 21137 20081 20041 20000 20208 20037 20278 20037 20278 20037 20278 20240 21972 20240 20048 20081 20240 20104 20041 20278 20106 20315 20067 20041 20320 21972 20209 20048 20081 20000 20041 20046 20106 20209 20278 20315 20035 20162 20104 20642 20222 21062 20035 20162 20048 20047 20240 20104 20432 21162 20184 20240 20000 20121 20209 20002 20348 20352 20479 21479 20000 20037 20000 20209 20081 20352 20000 20348 20642 21972 20037 20209 20041 20000 20642 20035 21062 20035 20162 20225 20226 20614 20836 21035 21162 21562 20043 20041 20035 20162 20037 20081 20240 2000
120. 09 20041 20067 20041 20642 21593 20037 20081 21162 20048 20041 20348 20642 20000 20278 20320 20278 20479 20642 20041 20278 20041 20320 20739 21996 12 TNIX Tocom Tokai Topline Toshiba Tosonic Totevision Touch Toyoda Tradex Triad Trix Uher Ultra Ultravox Unitech United Universum Vector Vector Research Victor Video Concepts Video Technic Videomagic Videosonic Viewsonic Villain Voodoo Wards Watson Weltblick Wharfedale White Westinghouse World XR 1000 Yamaha Yamishi Yoko Zenith ZT Group ZX 20037 20240 20037 20104 20041 20348 20081 20240 20045 20000 20042 20067 20043 20209 20041 20352 20432 20742 20845 21008 21145 21972 21996 20278 20037 20240 21972 20278 20081 20278 20037 20240 20045 20278 20278 20240 20348 20742 21593 20037 20081 20240 20000 20104 20209 20106 20348 21137 20045 20184 20038 20067 20041 20045 20000 20037 20240 20000 21972 20000 21972 20060 20035 20037 20048 20039 20047 20081 20033 20240 20045 20000 20042 20043 20041 20038 20046 20479 20081 20352 20642 20037 20642 20000 20209 20278 20479 20637 20209 20002 20348 20479 20035 20240 20000 20041 20038 20278 20037 20240 20037 20039 20033 20000 20209 20041 20278 20479 20637 21137 21479 21972 20209 20348 20352 13 PRESET CODE A C D G H
121. 092 10108 10653 11217 10047 10054 10017 10093 10463 10180 10264 10418 10761 10 83 10815 10842 10876 11933 10000 10217 11163 11556 10217 10264 10150 10092 10009 10035 10217 10264 10361 10433 10706 10037 10455 10264 10701 11904 10000 10060 10812 10178 10030 10145 10606 10631 10648 10714 10715 11207 11675 11676 11903 10548 10480 10433 10361 10264 10218 10208 10163 10037 10009 10051 10163 10817 10037 10371 10805 11911 10702 10602 10672 1857 10556 10371 10207 10035 PRESET CODE 4 Akashi Akiba Akira Akito Akura Alaron Alba Albatron Alfide All Tel Alleron Allorgan Allstar Ambassador America Action American High Amplivision Amstrad Amtron Anam Anam National Andersson Anglo Anhua Anitech Ansonic AOC Aolinpike Apex Digital AR Arc En Ciel Arcam Ardem Aristocrat Aristona ART Arthur Martin ASA Asberg Asora Astra Asuka ATD Atlantic 10008 10037 10418 10037 10171 10218 MOS 10170 10009 10163 10371 10668 10700 10672 10865 10030 10217 10037 10150 10180 10000 10217 10000 10037 10362 11037 10000 10250 10700 10250 11149 10009 10051 10009 10009 10374 10451 10178 10108 10264 10156 10767 10352 10109 10217 10037 10163 10037 11037 10163 10070 10037 10009 1003
122. 10 00299 00200 00566 00775 00869 00394 00882 01113 01317 00392 00566 01142 00775 00855 00143 01291 01392 01442 01214 01251 00200 00713 00853 01413 00713 01567 01251 00710 00820 00455 00820 01114 01253 01307 01690 01377 01142 01276 01108 01109 00853 00863 01206 01442 01458 01570 01609 01700 01916 01300 00713 01409 00713 01232 01100 Satstation Schaub Lorenz Schneider Schwaiger SCS Sedea Electronique SEG Seleco Septimo Serd Serino Servimat ServiSat Sharp Siemens Silva Skantin SKR SKY SKY Italia Sky Television Sky XL Sky Skymaster Skymax Skyplus SkySat Skyvision SL SM Electronic Smart Sony Star Star Choice Star Trak Starland Starlite Stream Strong Sunkal Sunny Sunsat Sunstar Supernova SVA Systec 01083 01214 00710 01206 01251 00394 00504 00863 01075 01083 01111 01317 01334 01412 01457 00299 00125 01206 01283 01626 01075 01087 01251 01626 00871 01375 01412 00610 01611 00713 01251 01517 00173 01334 01429 00299 00713 00713 00856 00099 00847 00887 01014 01175 01662 01693 01847 01848 01850 00853 01693 01847 01848 01014 01251 01412 01175 00713 01075 01085 01200 01334 01409 01567 01611 00200 01232 01334 01412 00713 01334 00299 01672 00713 01200 01409 00713 00882 01101 01113 01232 01404 01413 00639 01639 00455
123. 10163 10200 Elta 10009 10264 10865 11498 11037 11191 11960 10578 10548 10508 10327 10361 10512 Emerald 10178 10499 10481 10480 10343 Internal 10037 11909 Fujitsu ee re egies Gronic 10217 10217 10163 10109 10108 10047 10017 10154 10451 i 10706 10009 10036 10037 10037 10036 10035 10009 10008 10037 10217 10218 10236 10463 10180 10150 Fujitsu General 10009 10217 10683 U aoe Intervision 10264 10394 10455 10486 10070 10163 10195 10443 10178 10171 11944 11911 Grundig 10487 10556 10587 10672 Hitachi Fujian 10150 10108 10860 10487 Emerson 11909 10714 10668 10623 10683 11371 Hitec 10698 Irradio 10009 10037 10218 10371 10486 10036 10371 10370 Funai 10000 10180 10171 10264 10070 10073 Furi 10145 10264 10817 Grunkel 11163 Hoeher 10714 10865 11163 11556 ITC 10217 Envision 10030 10813 Furichi 10860 Grunpy 10180 Home Electronics 10606 ITS 10037 10218 10264 10371 Enzer 10860 mum 10264 10860 H H amp B 10808 Hongmei 10093 10009 10264 10817 TT 10163 10208 10346 10361 Erae 11371 10180 Haaz 10706 10264 10817 Erres 10037 G Galaxi 10037 Haiei We quu Z Hornyphon 10037 ITT Nokia 10346 10361 10480 10548 ESA 10812 11944 Galaxis 10037 10370 Haih 10009 Hoshai 10218 10455 10606 10610 ESC 10037 10217 erm 10817 HP 11494 11502 ITV 10037 10264 10374 Haiyan 10264 10817 IX 10877 Ether 100
124. 10335 10037 10218 11982 PRESET CODE 11165 10455 10037 10864 10208 10037 10009 10287 10587 10872 11504 10054 10178 10036 11904 10180 11944 10451 10092 11240 10092 10374 10361 10163 10036 10650 10154 10060 10009 11248 11756 10698 10808 10178 11149 10698 10418 10037 10037 10668 10487 10610 10264 10371 11944 10455 10805 10218 10556 10374 10335 11944 10036 11331 10009 10817 10367 10217 10218 TO 10171 10009 11163 10865 10670 10154 10000 10030 10171 10037 10876 10178 10171 10093 10060 10163 10170 10000 10156 10037 10036 10217 11156 11254 11371 10706 11037 10714 10668 10512 10264 10217 10163 10217 Technics TechniSat Technisson Technosonic Technovox Techview Techwood Tecnimagen Teco Tedelex Teiron Tek Teknika Tele System Electronic Teleavia Telecolor Telecor Telefunken Telefusion Telegazi Telemeister Telesonic Telestar Teletech Teleton Televideon Teleview Tempest Tennessee Tensai Tenson Tera Tevion Texet Texla ThemeScene Thomas Thomson Thorn Thorn Ferguson 10054 10556 10556 10714 10499 10030 10847 10250 10556 10051 10009 10653 10009 10606 10009 10820 10054 10060 10876 10287 10017 10037 10394
125. 10714 10808 10051 Minato Minerva Minoka Mirror Mitsubishi Mivar Monaco Monivision Morgan s Motorola MIC MTlogic Mudan Multitec Multitech Murphy Musikland Mx Onda Myryad NAD Naiko Nakimura Nanbao Nansheng Narita NAT Nationa NEC Neckermann NEI Neovia Netsat NetTV Neufunk New Tech New World Newave Nikkai Nikkei Nikko Nikkodo 10037 10070 10037 11900 10154 10180 10030 10817 10108 10217 10009 10700 10037 10054 10180 10011 10714 10051 10264 10037 11556 10180 10264 10163 10218 11498 10556 10156 10361 10037 10037 10009 10264 11982 10226 10051 10047 10053 11270 10661 10455 10170 10037 10418 10037 10865 10037 11755 10009 10610 10009 10556 10218 10093 10009 10163 10714 10178 10178 10556 10108 10250 11250 11917 10556 10037 10843 10051 10060 10370 10009 10817 10486 10009 10370 10178 10866 10606 10374 10264 10817 10208 10154 10178 11170 10653 10374 10036 10200 10556 10163 10876 10037 10714 10037 10178 10035 102197 10030 10030 10195 10487 10093 10236 10150 10178 11037 10836 18512 10185 10036 10011 10093 10150 10030 10092 10512 10208 10226 10668 11037 10037 10217 10486 10166 10037 11156 11982 10226
126. 10817 10821 11060 amam 10370 10486 10512 10679 adiomarell 11249 11312 11903 11959 en Ying 10092 10003 TT 10156 10051 10060 10178 10760 10866 11260 Sen ris er 10047 10154 10180 10150 10556 10371 10370 10362 Shencai 10145 10009 10264 10092 10036 10226 Pionier 10370 10486 11556 10178 10030 10037 11904 10264 10226 10217 10208 Soyea 10773 10009 10037 10264 10370 10163 10090 10037 10036 Se Nl IU ID Plantron 10009 10037 10264 Hadiotone i Spectra 10009 10418 10648 10668 11037 10035 10009 Shenyang 10009 10264 10817 Playsonic 10037 10217 10714 10715 Rank 10070 Sandra 10217 Sherwood 10009 Spectravision Polaroid ee Rank Arena 10036 10602 Sanjian 10264 Shintoshi 10037 oper Uy Mui RBM 10070 Sanky 10060 10030 10178 10037 10374 10443 Squareview 10171 Poppy 10009 Shivaki 10556 anan Tum 11447 10047 11454 10054 10463 10060 10030 10706 SR2000 10154 10171 ortlan 0451 10092 10374 10000 10051 10093 10178 em 10037 10371 10455 10602 Show 10009 10418 Ssangyong 10009 Powerpoint 10037 10487 10698 RCA Siarem 10163 SSS 10180 TT 80 Samum 1008 eec A uec G X 10047 10154 10180 10150 1004 10054 10154 10000 Siera 10037 10556 Standard 10009 10037 10217 10218 Premier 10009 10264 Realistic 10178 10030 10156 10463 10180 10145 10374 11037 President 10860 10037 TT Siesta 10370 Standard Comp
127. 120Hz 150Hz 20092 250Hz Distance FL Set distance from listening position to front left speaker Variable range 0 0ft 60 0ft Distance FR Set distance from listening position to front right speaker Variable range 0 0ft 60 0ft Downmix Option Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources Selectable items ON e Set this to ON if the sound from the front speakers seems distorted e When not using the center speaker or surround speakers the playback sound is down mixed and output from the front speakers Auto Surround Mode Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type Selectable items OFF I e The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below D Analog and PCM 2 channel signals 2 Dolby Digital and DTS 2 channel signals 3 Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel signals 4 Multi channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS PCM DSD etc e When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed Manual EQ Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer Adjust CH Select speaker adjustment method Selectable items Each All Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level Selectable items 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16
128. 2 VAUX Selectable items Auto PCM DTS d e This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to HDMI or Digital e Only set PCM and DTS when playing the respective signals Rename Change the display name for this source Names containing up to 8 characters can be input Characters that can be input A Z a z 0 9 496 amp amp lt gt N space El Source Level Corrects the playback level of the selected input source s audio input Variable range 12dB 0dB 12dB I For input sources for which HDMI or Digital are set at the GUI menu Assign setting the analog input level and digital input level can be set separately El Input Att Set when replay sound is distorted because the input level is too large Selectable items 6dB Playback Mode iPod Make settings for iPod playback Repeat Make settings for repeat mode Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items All One Shuffle Make settings for shuffle mode Input source CD DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items Songs Albums This be selected for input sources for which Assign is assigned at the iPod doc
129. 2 monitor Flow of video signals for ZONE3 ZONE3 High picture ZONES quality playback jc monitor S Video connector Video connector Video connector Video outputs Video inputs e When not using this function connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video input connector e The resolution of the HDMI input compatible monitor connected to the AVP A1HDCI can be checked at GUI menu Information HDMI Information Monitor1 or Monitor2 I page 55 e For optimum video performance THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to OFF to use video signals pass through system without up conversion Example View video input from a component video on the component video monitor e HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video connectors e 480p 576p 10801 and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S Video or Video format e When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate Speaker Layout The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and a monitor Subwoofer Center speaker Surround back speakers Front speakers Place the front speakers to the sides of the monitor or screen and as flu
130. 20320 20046 20106 20002 20278 20037 20048 20000 20104 20048 20240 20042 20106 20807 20880 20037 20048 20000 20104 20240 20278 Sampo Samsung Samtron Sanky Sansei Sansui Sanyo Saville SBR ScanSonic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scott Sears Seaway SEG SEI Sei Sinudyne Seleco Semp Sentra Sharp Shinco Shintom Shivaki Shogun Siemens Siera Signature Silva Silver SilverCrest Singer Sinudyne Smaragd Sonic Blue Sonographe Sonolor Sontec Sonwa Sony 20037 20060 20038 20240 20048 20048 20240 20041 20479 20048 20104 20348 20240 20081 20240 20000 20315 20037 20042 20642 20184 20060 20048 20045 20067 ARS 20278 20081 20642 20081 20081 20037 20045 20278 20037 20000 20000 20039 20037 20240 20037 20320 20081 20060 20000 20037 20278 20642 20037 20081 20348 20614 20046 20048 20037 20642 20035 20048 20047 20032 20000 20067 20046 20226 20636 21232 20033 20106 21972 20048 20240 20045 20000 20432 20739 21014 20039 20000 20067 20002 20106 21479 20047 20240 20067 20209 20479 21137 20278 20352 20104 20041 20348 20081 20240 20278 20348 21197 20035 20162 20039 20047 20000 20042 20043 20209 20046 20240 20278 20041 20048 20047 20209 20807 20081 20104 203
131. 3 DVD player recorder Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds to the device being operated and the mode as CD player recorder The signal transmission indicator flashes twice e In modes other than iPod the mode switches between DEV1 SM iri ihe m VCR TAPE and DEV2 each time the MODE SELECTOR is pressed Press NUMBER and input the 5 digit number of the P ETE Satellite Receiver Cable TV e In the AMP TUNER NET DTU and iPod modes when the remote CBL brand of the component to be preset The numbers ID is set the AVP A1HDCI can be used independently even in an SS ceed are shown in the Preset Code Table End of this environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers i E I AMP mode ZONE2 mode ZONE3 mode ianed When the code is registered the signal transmission indicator flashes twice When the preset code is transmitted the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes X The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 seconds Signal transmission indicator gie MODE SELECTOR ND ese Ct lt C AMP JJ o O ma 2 Some brands have more than one preset code If the component does not operate try inputting a different code ZONE4 mode Operating Preset Components Press
132. 30 10009 Gateway 11755 11756 Hua Tun 10009 Halifax 10217 10264 J JBL 10054 Ftron 10001 10008 10163 10820 ERG 10009 10163 10218 10374 Huafa 10145 10009 Hallmark 10236 10180 10178 JCB 10000 Eurofeel 10217 10264 11447 10047 11454 10000 mem m Huanghaimei 10009 Euroman 10037 10217 10264 10370 10051 10451 10093 10180 on Huanghe 10009 10817 JDV 11982 GE 10060 10178 10030 10092 Hanimex 10218 10156 10051 10236 10092 Europa 10037 11922 11917 11347 11147 Huanglong 10003 Jean 10009 10036 Europhon 10037 10109 10217 Huangshan 10009 10264 10817 JEC 10035 GEC 10037 10163 10217 10361 fn l dle de Evesham Technology 11248 Hanseatic 10370 10394 10499 10556 Huanyu 10217 10264 10374 10817 Jensen 10761 10815 10817 11933 mem 11756 Geloso 10009 10163 10374 10634 10661 10714 10808 10264 mp 10051 Expert 10163 Gemini 10047 Hantarex 10009 10037 10865 mum 10145 10264 10009 10264 General 10109 10287 Hantor 10037 20101 _ i 10000 10180 10080 10178 dd 10080 F Feilang 10009 ea pepe Huodateji 10051 Jinfeng 10051 10208 10226 10817 Feilu 10009 10817 __ Harman Kardon 10054 Hygashi 10217 Jinque 10009 10264 10817 Genexxa 10009 10037 10163 10218 Feiyan 10264 Harsper 10865 Hyper 10008 10217 J 10009 10264 10808 10865 10880 11217 Feiyue 10009 10817 Gericom 11298 i Harvard 10180 Hypersonic 10361 10054 10156 10145 10009 F
133. 31158 30630 30675 31033 31070 31431 31433 31536 3 1227 30675 31227 3 1227 31530 31222 91347 91730 30551 Sito 31227 31530 31530 31597 31530 31056 31056 311158 30646 31730 30741 DVD preset codes Codes pr r gl s DVD 32134 default d faut 30490 DENON Model No Mod le num ro DVD 555 DVD 755 DVD 900 DVD 910 DVD 955 DVD 1000 DVD 1200 DVD 1500 DVD 1710 DVD 1910 DVD 1930CI DVD 2200 DVD 2800 DVD 2800II DVD 2900 DVD 2930CI DVD 2910 DVD 3800 DVD 3910 DVD 3930CI DVD 5900 DVD 5910 DVD 9000 DVM 715 DVM 1800 DVM 1805 DVM 1815 DVM 2815 DVM 4800 DVD 800 DVD 1600 DVD 2000 DVD 2500 DVD 3000 DVD 3300 Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory Les codes pr r gl s diff rent en fonctiom des livraison de l usine X1 These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT CBL mode Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode SAT CBL X2 These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode TV X3 These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode VCR X4 These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode DVD PRESET CODE 16 DENON www denon com Denon Brand Company D amp M Holdings Inc Print
134. 35 37 e Network Setup e Distance Other e Channel Level e Crossover Frequency e THX Audio Setup e Surround Speaker J HDMI Setup 1227 32 e Color Space RGB Range e Auto Lip Sync e Audio x Treble e Monitor Out e HDMI Control L1 Audio Setup I amp page 33 34 Power Saving Character PC Language Rhapsody Account Network Information 12 Zone Setup IG page 37 38 e GUI ZONE2 ZONE3 Bass HPF Lch Level Rch Level e EXT IN Setup Channel Mode Volume Level Surround Back Input Surround Speaker Subwoofer Level Input Att Downmix Option e Auto Surround Mode e Manual EQ Volume Limit Power On Level Mute Level Video Convert ZONE2 only e 2ch Direct Stereo OSD LI HD Radio Play Play Preset Skip Auto Preset e Antenna Aiming Preset Skip Video Preset Name Video Select Video i p Scaler Video Select Resolution i p Scaler e Input Mode Resolution e Rename e Input Mode e Source Level e Rename e Source Level Parameter Check Speaker Configuration Check e Distance Check e Channel Level Check e Crossover Check e EQ Check e Restore Option Setup 1257 page 38 42 e Pre out Assign e XLR Out Polarity e POA Setting e Volume Control Volume Limit Power On Level Mute Level e Source Delete Screensaver Wall Paper Format Text M
135. 4 SATTI Chis us SAT 4 i DVR 1 6 COAXIAL oe lt Its setup a COAXIAL OPTICAL t does not operate with televisions or players that are not 50 65 a 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 0 Fas 1 2 8 compatible with HDMI s 9 Ope e When the AVP A1HDCI and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable also connect the AVP A1HDCI and monitor using an HDMI cable elf the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI D connector use an HDMI DVI converter cable When using a DVI cable no audio signals are transmitted e Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices NOTE e The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor For details see the monitor s operating instructions 4 e The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the e Connect High Definition Player in the same way HDMI input signals e When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVD Assign Digital I page 46 e When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVD Assign Component I amp page 47 E i E z Al
136. 42 lt RETURN _SVDO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 5 V AUX INPU ZONE OUTPUT ES 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF AUDIO 258 2 D SCALE button 45 p USB 19 D ZONE4 ON OFF button 83 D ZONE3 ON OFF button ese 83 ZONE2 ON OFF button ee 83 Q AUDIO DELAY button 54 Cursor buttons AV 4 gt eese 24 GAME button 48 INPUT MODE button me 45 9 7CH STEREO button mee 49 DSP SIMULATION button e 49 HOME THX CINEMA button 48 9 STANDARD button mee 49 PURE DIRECT button 50 Pe HENEN HENEN HENEN HENEN HENEN HENEN A HENEN HENEN Input signal indicators Input signal channel indicators These light when digital signals are input Information display The input source name surround mode setting values and other information are displayed here Output signal channel indicators Q Surround speaker indicators These light according to the settings of the surr
137. 45 31354 30665 30872 31104 30730 31730 30503 30591 30741 30869 31906 30784 31158 Airis Akira Alba Apex Digital Aristona Aspire Digital Belson Cat cello Centrum Classic Coby Commax Conia CyberHome Cytron Denon Denver Digitrex DSE Durabrand E max Ellion Eltax Emerson Ferguson Firstline Funai Gateway Go Video Goodmans GPX Grundig H amp B Humax iLo JVC Kansas Technologies Kreisen KXD LG Lifetec LiteOn Loewe Lumatron Luxor Magnavox Matsui Maxent MBO Medion MiCO 31321 31530 31056 30646 31168 31086 31421 31730 31227 31730 31086 31321 211125 31502 31347 30490 31056 31056 31 30 31502 31321 31421 31321 30675 31730 31530 30675 31158 30741 31158 31730 31595091790 30741 31730 31421 30646 31348 31164 31597 31530 31421 31321 30741 31347 31158 30741 JGA 31730 30646 30675 31730 31347 31730 31347 30751 lt gt lt c Mitsubishi Mustek NEC Oopla Palsonic Panasonic Philips Pioneer Polaroid ProVision Pye RCA Relisys Roadstar Sampo Samsung ScanMagic Schneider SEG Sensory Science Sharp Sony Star Clusters Sylvania Tangent Targa Teac Techwood Tevion Thomson Toshiba Universum Vestel Victor Waltham Yakumo Yamada Yamaha Yukai Zenith 31403 31730 31404 31158 31056 31321 30490 31579 30646 31158 30631 31086 31321 30646 30522 31347 31227 31347 30490 31635 3730 30646 31530
138. 47 20035 20037 20046 20479 20209 20348 20000 20046 20106 20000 2095 20045 20121 20043 20037 20033 20104 20041 20637 20032 20240 20000 20104 20046 20048 20240 20045 20348 20208 20352 20616 21137 20046 20278 Soundmaster Soundwave Stack 9 Standard Stern SIS Sunkai Sunstar Suntronic Supra Susumu SV2000 SVA Sylvania Symphonic Systemax T A Tagar Systems Taisho Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tchibo TCM Teac Technics TechniSat Technosonic Teco Tedelex Teknika Teleavia Telecorder Telefunken Telerent Telestar Teletech Tensai Tevion Texet Thomas Thomson Thorn Tisonic Tivo TMK 20000 20037 20209 21572 20278 20278 20042 20209 20278 20000 20000 20037 20278 20037 20000 20000 20035 20081 21593 21781 20240 20000 21972 20162 21972 20209 20278 20000 20104 20037 20048 20000 20048 20081 20067 20043 20348 20352 20348 20348 20037 20000 20278 20637 20035 20162 20000 20226 20348 20352 20035 20037 20038 20037 20209 20035 20037 20041 20240 20209 20041 20642 20226 20037 20000 20278 20037 20000 20209 20348 20278 20000 20002 20060 20067 20320 20037 20104 20278 20618 20636 20240 20000 PRESET CODE 20348 20348 20348 20000 20043 20002 21593 20081 20240 20045 20000 202
139. 5 Uher Ultra Ultravox Unic Line United Universal Universum 10093 11269 10236 11756 10017 10218 10748 10156 10009 10374 11037 10035 10218 10264 10587 10668 10154 11265 10166 11164 11656 10845 10618 10195 10035 10051 10217 10008 10178 10217 10037 10556 10009 10455 10712 10218 10217 11498 10218 10037 10250 10030 10463 10556 10037 10480 10092 10037 10037 10037 11037 10047 11163 10618 10370 10327 010195 10070 10009 10817 10180 10009 10037 10668 10780 11037 11256 10060 11087 11358 11704 10821 10508 10109 10011 10264 10264 10217 10865 10037 10512 10780 10556 10264 10346 10051 10092 10370 10486 10163 10455 10587 11982 10037 0057 10512 10362 10264 10170 10037 10178 10264 10163 11037 10156 11145 11156 11508 11945 10718 10264 10070 10009 10371 10668 11037 10264 10587 10556 10009 10374 10374 10714 10668 10480 10361 10217 10109 10036 10418 10698 10217 10150 10145 11163 11556 10650 10217 10036 10418 10715 10631 10418 10346 10200 10074 10011 Univox V V2max V7 Videoseven Vector Research Vestel Vexa Victor Videocon Videologic Videologique Videomac VideoS
140. 5 30843 30730 31730 O 0751 31225 30831 30741 30770 31004 31367 31367 30741 30869 31404 30717 30665 30770 30831 31197 31402 31923 SOS 202 32024 90872491929 30774 30831 30 52 31923 30843 31228 30 52 30672 30690 30833 30838 30862 31104 31832 30838 30503 30627 31158 31224 30843 30525 3057 30872 90095 312387 311695 30651 30719 31451 30695 30713 30 58 30768 30 90 30831 30831 30695 20713 311906 51920 30672 30852 31056 31321 30503 30490 30571 30703 31362 31462 31490 31579 31762 31834 31905 31908 30717 30789 31203 30898 31224 30690 30862 30503 30539 30646 30675 30854 30885 31158 31260 31267 31340 31354 0 Philo Phonotrend PianoDisc Pioneer Plu2 Pointer Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Powerpoint Presidian Prima Prinz Prism Pro2 ProCaster Proceed Proline Proscan Proson Prosonic ProVision Pye QONIX Qwestar Radionette RadioShack Raite RCA Realistic REC Redstar Relisys Reoc Revoy Rex Richmond RIO Roadstar Rocksonic Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod 31345 30699 31024 30490 30525 30571 30631 31965 30850 30784 31020 31061 31086 30539 30770 30872 31005 30675 31228 30831 30705 30831 31345 31004 30672 30672 30651 30686 30833 31004 31483 30522 30713 30699 30752 20699 30730 31163 31321 392S 3053
141. 5 20283 20439 20076 20029 20029 20076 203717 22471 20074 20308 20309 20375 20439 20439 20375 20029 20375 20182 20029 21314 20070 20071 20337 20244 20273 20274 20303 20304 20310 21309 20070 20071 20092 20233 20234 21364 200975 20308 20308 20029 20029 20009 20099 20283 20439 20029 20135 20136 20282 20027 20220 20337 20439 20308 20309 e U V W Y HDTV Tuner x1 gt G rm Palladium Panasonic Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Polk Audio Radiola RCA Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Sonic Sony TaeKwang Tandberg Teac Technics Technovox Thorens Universum Victor Wards Wharfedale Yamaha ABS Accurian Alienware CyberPower D Link Dgtec Epson Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hush iBUYPOWER LG Linksys Media Center PC Microsoft Mind Motorola Niveus Media Northgate 20375 20229 20029 20229 20337 20027 20220 20099 20109 250x917 20029 20029 20027 20220 20029 20029 20009 20074 20231 20371 20337 20375 20243 20170 20291 20234 ABIE 20439 20109 20280 20283 20289 20308 20309 20229 20229 20029 20375 20439 20244 20273 20274 20027 20029 20439 20097 20094 01272 01653 01272 01272 01554 01363 01563 01272 01272 01267 01272 01272 01267 01272 01272 01415 01272 01365 01272 01272 01805 01272 01363 01272 01272 X Z Packar
142. 5 30705 30770 30788 30790 30884 30898 1115 31205 3123 31695 30838 31005 30699 31321 30898 31051 31140 31233 31367 30672 30539 30717 30695 30699 30713 30730 30783 30884 31140 31530 31695 30790 31151 31451 30869 31224 30784 30770 30850 30852 30872 30 713 o07 70 9115 91967 30872 JHE 30759 30774 30831 00509 0672 90717 307 55 30794 30796 30797 30830 31004 31020 31056 31061 30539 30646 31023 31923 31224 31168 31224 30690 31923 30717 30790 30790 30713 30843 30730 30872 30730 31451 30713 30898 30862 31224 31163 31004 31086 31923 31923 30713 30833 30884 30717 1295591521 31321 30571 Blue Sky Boghe Boman Bose Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush Byd sign C Tech California Audio Labs Cambridge Audio Cambridge Soundworks Campomatic Digital Cat CCE Celestial cello Centrex Centrum CGV Changhong Cinea Cinetec cineULTRA CineVision Citizen Clairtone Classic Clatronic Clayton Coby Codex Commax Conia Contel Continental Edison Craig Creative Crown Crypto Curtis Mathes Cybercom CyberHome Cytron D Vision Daenyx 30672 30651 30695 30699 30713 30790 30843 31423 31004 30783 30898 31005 32023 30770 31115 30503 30651 30551 30695 30672 30717 30690 30699 00723 0 30831 30833 30884 31051 31140 31483 31695 81032 30872 SUUS CSS
143. 5 30713 30752 31256 32015 32024 30717 30741 30770 30717 30533 30839 31382 31005 31224 31224 30788 30898 30831 30898 31152 30885 30690 30751 30768 30672 30539 30713 30730 30768 30898 a111 30784 30690 30730 30768 31152 30705 30713 30755 30831 30573 30715 30783 30869 31099 30533 31533 30864 30573 30630 30772 31033 31070 31431 31433 31536 31633 31769 31981 32043 31229 30768 15 PRESET CODE Soundmax Soundwave Spectra Standard Star Clusters Starlogic Starmedia Stevison Strong Sunkai Sunstech Sunwood Superscan Supervision SVA Sylvania Symphonic Synn Tandberg Tangent Targa Tatung Tchibo TCL TCM Teac Tec Technica Technics Technika Technisson Technosonic Techwood Tedelex Telefunken Teletech Tensai Tevion Theta Digital Thomson Tivo Tokai Tom Tec Top Suxess Toshiba TRANS continents Transonic 30768 30783 30872 30651 30768 30788 30831 30898 3152291227 31005 31005 31224 31367 30713 30770 30850 30831 30788 30898 30821 30768 31152 90672 307 17 30752 311105 30630 30675 30821 31268 30675 30821 31268 30768 30713 31695 31321 31227 30770 31695 30741 31180 30741 30790 30571 30717 30675 30741 30759 30768 30790 30833 31006 31197 31227 30898 31367 31695 30490 30703 31905 30770 30831 31115 31695 30730 31051 31115 30715
144. 56 Power switch ON BILOFF RR 56 Door QUICK SELECT buttons 72 Q MASTER VOLUME control knob mme 56 9 Master volume indicator AV SURROUND PRE AMPLIFIER AVP A1HDCI Q Display Remote control sensor ew 4 D SOURCE SELECT knob eel 43 QD SOURCE oho retirees 43 D TUNING PRESET button Rel 57 B ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT button ees 69 83 D VIDEO SELECT button ur 45 G et t G zi 5 emt t d Q With the door open MODE DIRECT STEREO CINEMA MUSIC DIRECT RESTORER NIGHT DIRECT STEREO button eee 49 Headphones jack PHONES 56 70 CINEMA button eee 48 O RESTORER button 53 MUSIC button eee 48 Q NIGHT button 53 MENU button eee 24 CH SEL ENTER 24 72 RETURN button oee 24 D V AUX INPUT connectors 18 B ROOM EO button 53 D SETUP MIC 26 B DYNAMIC EO 53 D STATUS button 55 B DIMMER
145. 642 20000 20038 20037 20240 20000 20043 20209 20121 21555 20278 20041 20278 20320 20000 20352 20432 20048 20061 20000 20104 20043 20046 20226 20000 20042 20104 20037 20184 20039 20045 20000 20121 20209 20002 20278 20479 20637 21278 Firstline Fisher Flint Fuji Fujitsu Fujitsu General Funal Galaxi Galaxis Garrard Gateway GE GEC Gemini Genera General Technic Genexxa Go Video GoldStar Goodmans GPX Gradiente Graetz Granada Grandin Grundig Haaz Hanimex Hanseatic Haojie Harley Davidson Harman Kardon Headquarter Hewlett Packard HI Q Hinari Hisawa Hischito Hitachi Hoeher Hornyphon Howard Computers HP 20037 20209 21197 20039 20046 20209 20035 20037 20037 20037 20000 20278 20000 21977 20060 20000 21035 20081 20060 20045 20348 20037 20240 20035 20208 20226 20037 20208 20637 20037 20000 20240 20035 20240 20046 20037 20 42 20081 20348 20348 20352 20037 20240 20000 20081 20046 21972 20035 20240 20352 20209 20045 20035 20045 20046 20278 20081 21972 21972 20045 20042 20043 20278 20348 20480 20047 20000 20104 20348 20033 20045 20000 20000 20278 21593 20035 20048 20240 20226 20320 20807 21060 20000 20104 20278 20432 20614 21137 20480
146. 7 10217 10698 10001 5 PRESET CODE 10860 10218 10009 10264 11498 10036 10218 10418 10714 10843 11269 10170 10060 10370 10171 10163 10371 11982 10180 10180 10861 10037 11163 10264 10037 10037 10668 10093 10030 10748 11217 10556 10714 10556 10218 10037 10455 11556 11982 11037 10650 10264 11943 10264 10037 10163 10668 10714 10037 10073 10352 10370 10443 10487 10009 10011 10218 10264 10433 10648 10009 10037 10163 10370 10180 10060 10092 10009 10879 10765 Atori Auchan Audinac Audiosonic Audioton Audiovox Audioworld Aumark Autovox Aventura AVP Awa Axion Axxent Baler Baihe Baile Baird Bang amp Olufsen Baohuashi Baosheng Barco Basic Line Bastide Bauer Baur Baysonic Bazin Beaumark Beijing Beko Belcor Bell amp Howell Belson Belstar BenQ Beon Berthen Best Bestar Bestar Daewoo Binatone Black Diamond 10009 10163 10180 10009 10218 10486 10217 10451 10802 11952 10698 10060 10217 10171 10000 10451 10108 10606 11887 10009 10876 10009 10001 10037 10217 10565 10264 10009 10163 10009 10218 10668 10217 10805 10037 10512 10180 10217 10017 10812 10226 10817 10037 10486 10808 10030 10054 10698 11037 11032
147. 9 30646 31051 30651 30741 30869 31906 32024 30571 30665 30522 30571 30717 30790 30822 31022 31132 31769 31913 31965 30571 30490 30759 30763 30770 30788 30898 31345 31923 31347 30752 30768 30699 30841 30838 31233 30869 30672 30690 30639 30713 30730 30833 30898 31051 31227 30789 30872 30558 30623 30717 30759 30872 31004 30789 30651 3055 30798 30759 30831 31367 PRESET CODE 14 Salora Sampo Samsung Sansul Sanyo scan ScanMagic ScanSonic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Schwaiger Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sensory Science Shanghai Sharp Sharper Image Sherwood Shinco Shinsonic Siemssen Sigmatek Siltex Silva Silva Schneider SilverCrest Simaudio Singer Sistemas Skantic Skymaster Skyworth Sliding Slim Art SM Electronic Smart sonal Sonashi Sonic Blue Sony Sound Color Soundmaster 30741 30752 31321 31347 30490 30573 30744 30199 30820 30899 31044 31075 o looo o 30784 30695 30751 30763 30768 31051 31228 31230 31695 31832 30670 30675 30695 30713 30873 31228 30705 30850 90790 91790 31695 307710 07 31115 31151 30539 30646 30651 30705 30713 30774 30783 30788 30790 30831 30869 31367 30752 30768 30572 90851731005 31036 31233 31423 31224 31451 30798 30665 30713 30763 30872 30884 31483 31530 31158 30672 30630 3067
148. 9 Protec 10009 10037 10217 10264 oul Scott 10236 10180 10178 10030 10748 10009 10037 10264 10009 10037 10217 10264 Rover 10036 10877 Skyworth Pausa 10009 10047 10054 10017 10154 10698 10805 10817 1111 Protech 5 10418 10486 10668 11037 Rowa 10748 10009 10037 10264 10000 10156 10051 10093 Slidi 10865 10880 Paxonic 10060 10030 a 10178 10030 10001 10009 10587 10698 10712 10817 Sears 10060 10053 10178 10030 su 10156 10060 Peu 11498 Royal Lux 10335 10370 10171 10166 10035 10036 SLX 10668 10047 10000 10156 10250 i Runco 10017 10060 10030 Se COCA ABL RS Smaragd 10487 10051 10060 10178 10030 ProVision 10037 10556 10714 11037 Seaway 10624 Penney i U Ruyi 10817 Soemtron 10865 11298 10035 10036 10037 10070 Pulsar 10017 10092 Seelver 11037 10108 11347 10250 10109 10163 10287 Solar Drape 10000 Pulser 10178 10092 10009 10036 10037 10217 S Saba 10335 10343 10361 10498 Perdio 10037 10163 Pvision 10876 11191 10548 10560 10625 10714 CEC 10218 10264 10362 10487 Solavox 10037 10163 10361 10548 Petters 11523 e Saige 10009 10817 SEI 10037 10163 Sonawa 10218 l 10054 10451 10463 10180 Sei Sinudyne 10037 Songba 10009 10051 10208 1022 10009 10011 10163 10217 g Philco 10178 10030 10148 11667 0 Qingdao M STRN DS oan 10264 10163 10264 10346 10362 UM MIS Quadral 10051 10218 Saivod 10037 10668
149. AC 23 AG OUTLETS 23 XLR PRE OUT connectors e 11 HD Radio antenna terminals DTU ANTENNA 20 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors 22 D Digital audio connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL BNC 13 22 12 HDMI GOMnDGCIOLES o rne nn 1 2 B ETHERNET connector eee 21 USB D fte 19 D XM connector SAT 19 O WLAN ANTENNA terminal 21 FM AM antenna terminals TUNER ANTENNA RR 20 DENON LINK connector 18 D TRIGGER OUT jacks 23 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ee 22 Q XLR audio connectors CD e 14 DOCK CONTROL jack 14 9 SIGNAL GND terminal ese 14 VIDEO S VIDEO 13 G zi 5 emt t d D Q Remote Control Unit _J Main remote control unit RC 1067 MODE memo 111 Cue To RC 1067 Gp Signal transmission indicator e 73 Mode select buttons eie 73 Quick select System call buttons 72 77 Surround mode buttons 48 50 System buttons 74 75 Audio delay button A DL 54 Tuner system buttons 57 75 Input mode button INPUT 45 MENU button
150. AMP mode to select XM Teks Channel category display The display will switch as shown below depending on the reception conditions Display GUI Status GOOD MARGINAL WEAK NO Adjust the position of the antenna until SIGNAL GOOD is shown on the display 2 Use lt D to select the category then use A V to select the desired station Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly 1 Press SEARCH yoeqdeld 2 Press NUMBER then input the station s channel Example Accessing station XM123 1 gt 2 gt 3 X f no button is pressed within several seconds the station automatically switches to the one whose number has been input Press STATUS until the station you want to check example XM001 is displayed Press ENTER to set that station The radio ID is shown on the display Reception switches to the selected station 5 Press A Y and select channel 0 XM000 Radio ID 2 e LOADING is displayed while stations or data are being received D e CH UNAVAILABLE is displayed if the selected channel is no longer a part of the XM lineup e CH UNAUTHORIZED is displayed if the selected channel is not permitted to receive e XM is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked at GUI menu Source Select XM Antenna Aiming page 47
151. AY button e Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu Source Select NET USB Playback Mode Direct Play FAVORITES Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites ALL MUSIC Playback starts from the first track registered in the All Music folder e When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device When the media server is stopped or restarted it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites CHANNEL Preset channel memory block selection Adjustment of volume X1 Muting 1 Selected zone menu SAT TU NET USB iPod Zone selection M 72 Z3 24 ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection ZONEOF Power turned off 1 ZONE ON Power turned on X1 M Z2 Z3 24 Z2 Z3 24 Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Power turned off X1 Power turned off X1 Power turned on X1 Power turned on X1 SOURCE SELECT Input source selection CHANNELe Preset channel selection mar block selection x Adjustmentofvolume KT MUE Selected zone menu A A Category search la ENTER BEEN RETURN lt lt TUNING A Y REPEAT ALL MUSIC x Media server only FAVORITES X Channel selection X1 Affects the currently selected zone 7X2 In ZONEA it is not possible to
152. CT PLIIx CINEMA M DIRECT PLIIx MUSIC 71 WMA Windows Media Audio 4 AAC FLAC LINEAR ANALOG PCM WAV Note DIS ES MTRX With Flag DTS ES DSCRT With Flag O Baa OC O Bae O OC BO EMI O ESO BO BO Bae Be Ed Ed xX Be x Ed Kd xX Bae x ES xX gt Be x 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None 4 You can select this when the headphone plug is inserted into the headphone jack DTS DTS 5 1ch 96 24 x EM x ES X ES x ES x ES X Input signals DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD cine doni DSD DSD pa d ii multi ch 2ch With Flag DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL 5 1 5 4ch DVD Audio multi ch DIGITAL EX With no Flag e x B gG x j x B O W O x EM x Be x Be x Be 8 x EB x B Q x G x ERI O R O x Ba OPI OR x x x x x x x x x x x x x O x gt Ba x x EMI x ES x ES x ES x ES x x Oo Be x Pix O x x x x x x x O x ES O EIL OR xE Mode selectable in initial status Mode fixed when AFDM is ON Selectable mode Non selectable mode xooe 92 A
153. Convert Input signal Monitor output Monitor output when GUI menu displayed HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x x X x X 4 4 4 4 x x x X VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 X VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 x x O X X S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 x x O O X S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 X 1080p x x x COMPONENT x x X 4 4 4 4 x O 480p 720p x X X 1 COMPONENT 1 x x X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 x x x 4801 5761 x X X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 X 1080p X O X VIDEO 1 COMPONENT VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 X VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 X O 480p 720p X Q X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 x VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 X VIDEO x 4801 5761 X O X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 X 1080p O x X S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 X 480p 720p O x X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO x O 480i 576i O X X COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 X 1080p O O X S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT S
154. DENON AV SURROUND PRE AMPLIFIER AVP AT1HDCI Owner s Manual GUI Graphical User Interface Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen GUI Menu Operation 1257 page 24 GUI Menu Map page 25 Language I page 43 Remote Control Unit Operations i page 73 I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK A DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 10 11 12 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference Heed Warnings All warnings on the
155. DMI 3 COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO O O 480p 720p O O HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO HDMI 3 COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO Q O 4801 5761 Q HDMI 2 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 HDMI 3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT X X X X x 4 O x x O x VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 X VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 O X O x x S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 x S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 Q X O O X S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 1080 x x x COMPONENT x x x 4 4 4 Without HDMI _ 480p 720p x x x COMPONENT 1 x x x COMPONENT 3 monitor O 4801 5761 x x x COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 Or Q O 1080p X Q X COMPONENT VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 x VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 with HDMI O 480p 720p x O x COMPONENT 1 x VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 x VIDEO O 4801 5761 x O x COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 1 x COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 nie 1080 X X COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 x S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 O O 480p 720p Q X X COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO O 4801 5761 O x x COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 Q 1080p O O x COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 O 480p 720p O O X COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO Q
156. DP fo ONTO Du ulis Hs I uli uli 1 GROUND unu BACT 227 SNES HDP SAT VCR Pod DVR 1 DVR 2 ooooo RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE AUDIO 990 e When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select CD Assign Digital I page 46 e The default analog audio input setting is RCA When using a balanced cable for the analog audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select CD Assign Analog I page 47 The default AVP A1HDCI balance model XLR input connectors pin alignment is as shown D GROUND A 2 HOT QO 3 COLD Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod ASD 1R sold separately to connect the iPod to the AVP A1HDCI For instructions on the Control Dock for iPod settings refer to the Control Dock for iPod s operating Instructions Example USE 891801 HnMI 116 ween 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 CD ex J 299 DEO DVR 9801 2 NOM JHOT 1905 ING RS 232C STRAIGHT CABLE AUDIO PRE OUT e With the default settings the iPod can be used connected the VCR iPod connector e To assign the iPod t
157. EQ XT when Restore is selected 28 Manual Setup Make detailed settings for various parameters Speaker Setup Use this procedure to set the speakers manually or if you wish to change the settings made with the auto setup procedure Menu tree Manual Setup Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration Subwoofer Setup Distance EW Channel Level Crossover Frequency 1 THX Audio Setup Surround Speaker EN Speaker Configuration Select speaker configuration and size bass reproduction capability Front Select front speaker size Selectable items Large Center Select center speaker use and size Selectable items Large None Subwoofer Select subwoofer use Selectable items No Surround A Select surround speakers A use and size Selectable items Large None Surround B Select surround speakers B use and size Selectable items Large None Surround Back Select surround back speaker use and size Selectable items Large None 1spkr Large Select this for a large speaker with strong bass reproduction Small Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass reproduction e Select Large or Small according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at Crossover Frequency I page 31 e When Front is set to Small Yes elf Subwoofer
158. EREO 23 pV 38 5 dBf MONO 77dB STEREO 72 dB HD 85 dB 85 dB MONO 0 2 STEREO 0 3 HD 0 01 0 01 Conforming to IEEE 802 11b Conforming to IEEE 802 119 Conforming to Wi Fi DS SS 11 5 5 2 1 Mbps Automatic switching OFDM 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps Automatic switching SSID Network name WEP key network key 64 128 bits WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK TKIP AES 2 412 MHz 2 472 MHz Conforming to IEEE 802 11b 11ch DS SS Of which 1 channel used Conforming to IEEE 802 11g 11ch OFDM Of which 1 channel used AC 120 V 60 Hz 2A 0 3 W Standby 434 W x 214 H x 488 D mm 17 3 32 x 8 27 64 x 19 7 32 27 kg Approx 59 Ibs 8 oz 1 Main remote control unit RC 1067 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight LR6 AA Type two batteries 63 W x 238 H x 31 D mm 190 g Approx 6 7 oz including batteries 1 Sub remote control unit RC 1070 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight Type two batteries 49 W x 220 H x 24 5 D mm 114 g Approx 4 oz including batteries Wi Fi conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices X For purposes of improvement specifications and design are subject to change without notice 104 Denon Amp D Denon Denon Tuner D Denon Analog Denon XM Radio Denon HD Radio Denon iPod D Denon
159. FM or in step 1 by pressing TUNER e f the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning tune it in manually e When tuning in stations manually press and hold V to change frequencies continuously e The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI Tuner I page 40 Presetting Radio Stations Preset Memory Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily Up to 56 stations can be preset 1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset 2 Press MEMO Press A G to select the block in which the station is to be preset then press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the preset number X The memory block can also be selected by pressing SHIFT 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting To preset other stations repeat steps 1 to 4 e Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu Source Select TUNER Auto Preset I page 44 Preset stations are erased by overwriting them Listening to Preset Stations Operation on the Main Unit Press TUNING PRESET gt then turn SOURCE SELECT to select the preset radio station Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit 2 Recalling preset stations from the remote control unit 1 Press A G to select the memory block Press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the desired preset channel 2 Default settings
160. I OOO OO SOURCE SELECT iO O O 10 0 0 iy Mesum MUTE A9 Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Multi Zone Operations Turning the Power On and Off Operation on the main unit Press lt ZONE2 ON OFF gt lt ZONE3 ON OFF gt or lt ZONE4 ON OFF gt for the zone to be operated When the power turns on the multi zone indicator lights on the display Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate press ON or OFF Selecting the Input Source Operation on the main unit D Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted 2 Turn SOURCE SELECT Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate press SOURCE SELECT Adjusting the Volume Operation on the main unit D Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted 2 Turn VOLUME to adjust Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust press VOLUME Variable range 70dB 40dB 18dB e The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu Manual Setup Zone Setup select the zone Volume Level is set to Variable The volume can be increased up to th
161. IN 1787 11900 0 30695 Palsonic 11904 Sess 20278 20352 20637 ae 70348 S Saivod Pacific Sud Panasonic 10250 10051 REI _ Sylvania 20081 21781 Samsung 11903 31490 Penne 10051 Grundig 20081 20347 20352 20742 70000 Schneider 11982 Philips 30539 30854 31260 Philips 10037 10556 Hanimex 20392 T EN 20352 es Ln R RCA _ Q Quasar 10250 10051 nn Teac 20037 20000 20637 20642 Sova S R Radiola 10556 oe Technics 20081 11982 ee RadioShack 11904 Technosonic 20352 Sylvania 10171 Sansui 30695 a 10047 10051 10093 11917 Telefunken 20278 T Teac 10698 Schneider 31367 11922 internal 20278 20637 Thomas 20000 Technica 11982 SEG 30713 30884 S Saba 10625 J JBL 20278 erem 20278 Telefunken 10698 Sliding 31115 Samsung 11999 UG A Toshiba 20352 20432 20845 21145 Thomson 10625 Stevison 31367 Sansui 10463 11904 11911 K Kambrook 20037 U United mm i Transonic 10587 Sylvania 30630 30675 31268 Schneider 10037 10556 11904 Kneissel 20278 20352 ym U United 10587 11037 11982 T Technica 31367 Sears 11904 Liz 20037 20480 21237 W Westinghouse 20278 20637 V Vestel 11037 Thomson 30551 Sharp 10093 11917 Lloyd s 20000 Z Zenith 20000 20479 20637 21479 x4 Toshiba 30695 Siemens 10037 Loewe 20037 X4 A Akai 30605 U United 30713 30884 31367 Sony 10000 11505 11904 M Magnasonic 20278 21278 T hone 30551 m ue I Universum 30713 ane EE E 20000 21781 Vestel 30884 ymp
162. Large elf Surround A is set to None Surround B and Surround Back are automatically set to None e When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the left channel SBL e To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems set the front center and surround speaker size parameters to Small and the subwoofer to Yes Subwoofer is automatically set to is set to No Front is automatically set to Subwoofer Setup Select subwoofer output configuration and bass signal for playback Confiquration Select number of subwoofers and configuration Selectable items 2SPL R 2SP 3SPL R LFE 3SP MIX Subwoofer Configuration Subwoofer Connector 2SP L R When Subwoofer 2 and Subwoofer 3 are each displayed 2SP MIX or 3SP MIX is selected Subwoofer 1 Mode Select bass signal for playing with the subwoofer Selectable items LFE THX LFE Main e THX recommends LFE THX mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the room e his can be set when the GUI menu Subwoofer is set to Yes e Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass e Select LFE Main if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer Speaker Configuration Distance Set distance from listening position to speakers Before making the settings measure the
163. NE The items displayed differ according to the input source Items to be checked Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode Dynamic EQ Video Select i pScaler Source Level Rec Select Night Mode RESTORER etc ZONE2 3 4 Shows information about settings for multi zone Items to be checked Power SelectSource Volume Level 54 suonoeuuo pexie3s Burners 043u02 oeqAeld euoz ninig uonjeunoju Buljooysajqnoly Audio Input Signal eiu Shows information about audio input signals Hw O Menutree ex Audio Input Signal Items to be checked Surround Mode The currently set surround mode is displayed Signal The input signal type is displayed fs he input signals sampling frequency displayed Format The number of channels in the input signal front surround LFE is displayed Offset The dialogue normalization correction value is displayed Flag MATRIX is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing DISCRETE if the input signal has undergone discrete processing Dialogue normalization function Dialogue Normalization Dial Norm is a feature of Dolby Digital which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital sometimes you may see a brie
164. PLIIx CINEMA PLII CINEMA ProLogic NE0 6 CINEMA Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc Selectable items HOME THX CINEMA This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing THX surround sound The display when the HOME THX CINEMA mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode Input signal Display other than 2ch DOLBY DIGITAL EX I muse Mode DOLBY DIGITAL Plus THX Cinema DOLBY TrueHD PLIIx C THX DTS 5 1ch ES MTRX6 1 THX 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 ES DSCRT6 1 THX 2 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 THX Ultra2 Cinema DTS 96 247 THX Music Mode DTS HD High THX Games Mode Resolution Audio THX Cinema DTS HD Master Audio Dolby Digital Source DTS Surround Source PLIIx C THX THX SURROUND EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode THX Games Mode PLIIx C THX M CH 5 1 THX M CH 71 THX 1 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Matrix 6 1 and the AVP A1HDCI s AFDM setting is set to ON 2 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Discrete 6 1 For details see page 91 PCM multi ch DSD multi ch yw Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Press the HOME THX CINEMA button on the main unit or the THX button on the main remote control unit Standard Playback This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according to the
165. Picture Black Gray Blue Format Select the video output signal format to match the monitor Selectable items NTSC PAL When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor is set the picture will not be displayed properly Use the procedure described below to change the video format w Operating from the main unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting D Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Use the 1 gt button to make the setting 3 Press the ENTER MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting Text Text information display Selectable items OFF Master Volume Master volume display during adjustment Selectable items OFF NET USB iPod Tuner This sets the time the on screen display is displayed when an operation is performed Selectable items Always 10s OFF Quick Select Name Change Quick Select display name Up to 16 characters can be input Input characters A Z a z 0 9 amp 4 3 lt gt space 40 Trigger Out 1 Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone Input source Surround mode HDMI monitor etc For details about the trigger out function see page 23 El Trigger Out 2 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2 in the same way as Trigger Out 1 a
166. Room is always set to OFF El Dynamic Make Dynamic EQ settings Selectable items ON yw Operating from the main unit Press the DYNAMIC EQ button e Dynamic is displayed when selecting Audyssey Audyssey Flat or Audyssey Byp L R in the Room EQ setup When set to ON the r indicator is lit e When the audio setup measuring results have changed Aubvssev lights RESTORER his function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound Selectable items OFF Mode1 RESTORER 64 Mode2 RESTORER 96 Mode3 RESTORER HO The default setting for NET USB and iPod is Mode3 All others are set to OFF Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit During playback press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the RSTR button on the main remote control unit When set to something other than OFF is displayed OFF Mode 1 Mode 2 RESTORER 64 RESTORER 96 Mode 3 E RESTORER HO About the RESTORER function e Such compressed audio formats as MP3 WMA Windows Mledia Audio and MPEG 4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression restoring the sound to conditions near those of
167. SOLIOS oor nities 3 Cautions on Handling e MEE MEN RUE 3 Cautions on Installation oro eror hr hy 3 About the Remote 3 Inserting mese Ho uM d Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit 4 Part Names and Functions 4 4 5 Display E O CPD s D 5 ROAT pam e aod nOn 6 Remote Control Unit IR ERE e 7 Connections Preparations aa E E E E E meee on E E E EE E 8 Cables Used for Connections UU EUER g Vadeo Conversiomp ENE E 9 Speaker Layout rr emcee aL aan 10 Connecting to the Power Amp aa S sate ain ELSE nancies EA 10 POA A1HDCI Connection and Operation Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors NIS Connecting the Monitor n 2 U 5 13 Connecting the Playback Components 13 DVD Player mM MI O 13 Player 14 CD Player naman ae MEUM TM HOG T J TV CABLE Tuner 15 Satellite Receiver 15 Connecting the Recording Components eS AURIS IRE 16 Digital 16 Video Cassette Recorder IER ERATES UE UE 1 CD Recorder MD Recorder Tape 17 Connections to Other Devices n 18 Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector e 18 Video Camera Game COnsSole
168. Selectable items Surround Back ON Surround Back OFF THX Games Mode J In the THX mode for Multi channel sources Selectable items THX Surr EX ESDSCRT ES MTRX 7 1 THX PLIIx Cinema THX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode THX Games Mode Surround Back OFF Decoder Select this when playing analog PCM or other 2 channel sources The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode In the THX mode for 2 channel sources Selectable items PLIIx CINEMA CINEMA ProLogic 6 CINEMA LJ In the DOLBY HEADPHONE mode Selectable items PLII CINEMA PLI MUSIC 6 CINEMA NEO 6 MUSIC OFF Cinema EQ Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding Selectable items ON 51 DRC Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds Selectable items Low Middle High OFF This be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode D COMP Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds Selectable items OFF Low Middle High When playing DTS sources this is only displayed for compatible software LFE Adjust the low frequency effects level LFE Variable range 10dB OdB For proper playback of the different program sources we recommend setting to the values below e Dolby Digital sources 0 dB e DTS movie sources dB e DTS music sources
169. T 73 Operating Preset Components E tt T3 S Setting the Remote 76 Learning FUNCION e cl 2L 0 UT 76 System Call FUNCION p Punch Through FUNCION us ass V Setting the Time the Backlight Stays IM 78 Adjusting the Backlight s Brightness 78 Resetting the Mein Remote Control 78 Sub Remote Control Unit Operations P E I 79 80 Switching ZONES eee cux MEI MU LEE 81 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode Mee 81 Setting the Remote 81 Resetting the Settings MM MR M metas ees 81 Multi Zone Gonnections 82 Multi Zone Operations vto dee rude 53 Turning the Poweron ee nn nn hk ends 53 Selecting the Input 83 Adjusting the Volume e s v a entr a pex e EY NUES E EYE anis usus sasha 83 Turning off the Sound Temporarily 93 Other Information Troubleshooting Specifications cnt Onin En LO 18 5 104 List of preset COGS ooo cci eie oe dies End of this manual G zi et t Getting Started Thank you for purchasing this DENON product To ensure proper operation please read this owner s manual carefully before using the product After reading them be sure to keep them for future reference Accessories Check that the following parts are supplied with the product
170. TLETS AC 120V 60Hz e Connect the monitor for ZONE2 the same as the ZONE2 ZONES Pre out Connectors IG See left column e f the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog change to PCM 2 channel signal and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors 22 5 5 ES 5 o 5 5 o External Controller WLAN SAT TU S ANTENNA LJ TUNER AM ANTENNA T A T pmi LOOP ANT H 1 DVD 2 3 Gale DN _ LINK o DIGITAL R o sa 21 9 ps 2 1 DVD 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 Cl comin 9 9 9 E EDIE ee nel S S VIDEO RS 232C connector This connector is used for an external controller SIGNAL GND o d 7 oJ o o o o o oJ o o o o Zr 260000006 29000000 X f you use an external controller to operate the unit via the RS 232C terminal you must confirm the following beforehand D Turn on the AVP A1HDCI s power 2 Turn off the AVP A1HDCI s power from the external controller 3 AVP A1HDCI enters the standby status 2 NON INVFRTING E 2 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE e When using in combination with RF Remote Cont
171. The surround back channel signal is a matrix encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital SL surround left and SR surround right channels Upon playback the signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL SR and SB channels and output as 6 1 channels of signals With the AVP A1HDCI the signals further undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround EX system Even without the proper environment for playing the SB channel Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 10096 compatible with existing 5 1 channel playback systems so they can be played as such In this case the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal from both the SL and SR channels so none of the signal components are missing The effects specific to THX Surround EX the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the sound however are the same as with conventional 5 1 channel surround systems THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some Jurisdictions All rights reserved Surround EX 15 a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Used with permission Neural Surround Neural Surround a breakthrough in audio technology will bring the excitement of surround music to more of America s listening audience It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 96 compatible with stereo With superior spectral resolution an
172. W Playing repeatedly Press CHANNEL or REPEAT on the sub remote control unit Selectable items All One GUI Source Select input source Playback Mode iPod Repeat IG page 46 62 a lt o D x Shuffling playback Press CHANNEL or RANDOM on the sub remote control unit AV lt i gt ENTER lt STATUS gt Selectable items Albums Songs GUI Source Select input source Playback Mode iPod Shuffle 1 page 46 Searching up or down pages Press SEARCH then press 1 down or gt up To cancel press AV or SEARCH To switch between the Browse and Remote modes Either press and hold SEARCH e The title name artist and album can be checked by pressing STATUS during playback e On the AVP A1HDCI folder and file names can be displayed as titles Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period e he time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI iPod Ie page 40 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the gt lt T ENTER iPod ff e Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor E AV lt I gt Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions SEARCH Press and hold SEARCH to set the Remote mode CHANNEL Remote iPod is displayed on the AVP A1HDCI s display
173. Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed either download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a Windows update installer 2 Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver 11 either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update installer X When using Windows Vista there is no need to download a new version of Windows Media Player i USB memory devices A USB memory device can be connected to the AVP A1HDCI s USB port to play music and still picture JPEG files stored on the USB memory device Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transfer Protocol standards can be played on the AVP A1HDCI The AVP A1HDCI is compatible with USB memory devices in FAT16 or FAT32 format Album art function When an MP3 music file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while playing the file Slide show function Still picture JPEG files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture is displayed can be set When still picture JPEG files are played the AVP A1HDCI they are played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play Compatible formats radio Codec JPEG WMA Windows Media Audio MP3 MPEG 1 O Audio Layer 3 WAV Q MPEG 4 AAC O oF O O O O FLAC Free Lossless Aud
174. adix RCA Rebox sagem samsung sat Control Schneider Schwaiger Sedea Electronique Serd SKY 01377 00392 00639 01142 01076 00099 01392 01442 01640 01505 00775 01505 00775 01075 01237 01505 00775 00610 00775 01356 01214 01412 01412 01159 01412 01680 01142 01442 01176 01427 01675 01075 01075 01159 01300 00249 00658 01221 01561 01075 01334 01206 01412 01075 01412 00869 01214 01333 01559 01560 01693 01848 01850 01334 01023 01412 01412 01175 01356 01423 01850 01304 01142 00099 01442 01339 00392 oSm 01392 01214 01253 01307 01206 01442 01570 01609 01300 01206 01075 01412 01206 01412 01175 01693 01848 01850 X Z X3 H P S SKY Italia Sky XL Skymaster Skyplus Sony Star Choice Strong Sunny TechniSat Thomson Topfield TES Xtreme Zehnder Hughes Network Systems Philips Samsung 01848 01412 01075 01412 00639 01640 00869 01300 01300 01195 01197 01175 01534 01662 01206 01545 01783 01253 01307 01300 01075 01412 20739 20739 20739 Television 1 A 888 A Mark A R Systems Accent Accuscan Accuscreen Acoustic Research Action Acura Addison ADL Admiral Advent Adventur Adyson AEG Agashi Agna Aiko Aim Aiwa Akai 10264 10047 10054 10009 10037 10352 10374 10455 10556 10009 10037 10047 10001 11269 10030 10650 10009 10
175. ahua Xianghai Xiangyang Xiangyu Xihu Xingfu Xingha XLogic Xoceco Xoro XR 1000 Xrypton Yamaha Yamishi Yapshe Yingge Yokan Yoko Yonggu Yorx Youlanasi Yousida Yuhang Zanussi Zenith ZhuHai 10865 11298 10455 11191 10634 10008 10817 10009 10264 10009 10264 10009 10264 10698 11064 11196 10154 10037 10030 10037 10250 10009 10037 10009 10264 10009 10030 10817 10009 10009 10163 10047 10463 10030 10092 11911 10009 10877 10661 10264 10817 10860 11217 10370 10218 10374 10180 10650 10217 10037 10217 10017 11205 11145 10037 10880 11217 10698 10773 10171 11576 10218 10455 10217 10218 10264 10000 10093 10812 10178 10145 10171 11904 11909 TV DVD Combination x2 4 X2 A Advent Akai Akura Alba Amstrad Apex Digital Audiovox Axion Black Diamond Bush Centrum Crown D Vision Denver 11933 11675 11982 11037 11982 11943 117 11937 11037 10698 11037 11037 11982 10587 Ale Shy 952 11958 11037 11900 E Elfunk es DMTech Broksonic 1Sa Akai 20352 Palsonic 20000 F Ferguson 11037 E Elfunk 30713 30884 Bush 11556 Alba 20352 n Rd s Finlux 11556 Emerson 30675 31268 C Curtis Mathes 10051 America Action 20278 20035 20037 20240 21035 G Goodmans 10587 11037 11900 ESA 31268 D Daewoo 11909 Amstrad 20000 P
176. al transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed e With some remote control units the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned In this case use the device s own remote control unit e earned buttons have priority over the preset memory If you no longer need the learned setting reset the learning function I page 78 NOTE e HOME cannot be learned e Do not learn any remote control signals at RC SETUP e ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned 76 e o O gt 2 013005 1ouu u Signal transmission indicator C AMP POWER ON RC SETUP lt lt gt gt I gt lt lt gt gt 01 g 1 System Call Function This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button For example the amplifier can be turned on the input source selected the monitor s power turned on the source device s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button Up to 32 signals each can be registered at SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 Registering Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to register Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator f
177. andard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States It uses the 2 4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license ISM band enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps d The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate IEEE 802 11g This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States and is compatible with IEEE 802 11b It also uses the 2 4 GHz band but enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps I The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate Infrastructure Communications Infrastructure Communications refers to networks using wireless LAN access points This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN via a wireless LAN access point Wireless LAN access points include wireless broadband routers Ad hoc Communications Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred to as ad hoc communications With such ad hoc communications there is no connection to the Internet Ad hoc communications are suited for
178. aster Volume NET USB iPod Tuner e Quick Select Name e Trigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 e Trigger Out 3 e Trigger Out 4 e Transducer Setup Digital Out e Remote ID e 2Way Remote e Dimmer e Setup Lock e Maintenance Mode e Firmware Update Add New Feature Q Language 43 Auto Setup Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to Optimize settings for speakers in use Auto Set the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit uto e up The Auto Setup screen appears automatically Menutree 0000050 000000 e Auto Setup e Audyssey MultEQO XT automatically measures the acoustical MS OY i E Auto Setup problems in the listening environment to create the best audio sound nma experience for your home theater receptor Option e t optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are Parameter Check seated Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone T DM A505Z successively at multiple positions throughout the lt Auto Setup listening area as shown in Example D For best results it is Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand m sc A Om EU e Ud strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the with the microphone pointing directly up towards the 9 s e a measurements have the proper spatial weighting ceiling Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example measuring at multiple po
179. ations R gist ring Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites Listening to Internet Radio resetting internet facio Stations oo Wegste Use A V to select Internet Radio then press ENTER or D Use AV to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or gt The station list is displayed Use A V to select the station then press ENTER or Ex Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 e There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely Generally the higher the bit rate the higher the sound quality but depending on the communication lines and server traffic the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted Inversely lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted e Server Full or Connection Down is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting e On the AVP A1HDCI folder and file names can be displayed as titles Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period 2 Recently Played Internet Radio Stations Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from Recently Played in top menu Use AV to select Recently Played then press ENTER or P Use AV to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or gt Up to 20 stations stored in Recently Played Preset Internet radio sta
180. be stored in the memory Set the input source input mode surround mode room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you want to store 2 Press A V or CH SELECT to select Fader Use lt gt to adjust the volume of the speakers lt front gt rear e The fader function does not affect the subwoofer e The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value 15 12 dB Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights Quick Select Defaults InputSouce Volume d e To call out the settings press QUICK SELECT at which the desired settings were stored e The Quick Select name can be changed IGS page 40 Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Source Delete page 40 In this case store them again Personal Memory Plus Function his function sets the settings input mode surround mode HDMI output mode Picture Adjust Audio Delay etc last selected for the individual input sources When you switch to an input source the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was used I The surround parameters tone control room EQ settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround
181. bove Trigger Out 3 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 3 in the same way as Trigger Out 1 above Trigger Out 4 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 4 in the same way as Trigger Out 1 above Selectable items ON Setting with Respect to the Zone When the power of the zone turned on off the trigger out turns on Setting with Respect to the Input Source When the input source set to on is selected the trigger out turns on Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to ON at Setting with Respect to the Zone Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode When the surround mode set to on is selected the trigger out turns on This is effective when the MAIN ZONE has been set ON for the Setting with Respect to the Zone and the input source which is set to has been selected for the Setting with Respect to the Input Source 41 Setting with Respect to the Monitor When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected the trigger out turns on This is effective when the MAIN ZONE has been set to ON for the Setting with Respect to the Zone and the input source which is set to has been selected for the Setting with Respect to the Input Source Transducer Setup Set when using transducer The Transducer Setup be accessed through GUI menu Speaker Setup Sub
182. broadcast is properly tuned In Rear Panel G zi emt t d WLAN XLR 2 ANTENNA ee ee ETHERNET earar SELECTABLE N DENON LINK BNC d 4 DIGITAL a ASSIGN ABLE tok Mens T e core T 3 FI MG 4 lA 1 GROUND 2 NON INVERTING HOT 5 3 INVERTING COLD Sc 0 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE x 9 PR CR sees Y zug PB GB PR AUDIO LIN 9 0 COO OO OJR DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR iPod DVR 1 DVR 2 CT e nnd 1 GROUND EH NX 2 NON INVERTING fo HOT PHONO Sun 3 3 INVERTING a 9 O mmmmm g TEES COLD HO 3l 2 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE Hu Fa s FG s B BG Ea F FG Bu BG EG Ea FG Ea H FG Ha H H H SG AUD m z EERE RRR RRR RRR 2t N E _ _ _ _ _ _ SWITCHED TOTAL 120 1 MAX RE m AC OUTLETS AC 120V 60Hz RE CONTROL LINK connector 11 RS 232C connector eee 23 Analog audio connectors AUDIO 14 RCA PRE OUT connectors 11 22 EXT IN connectors eee 18 Q AC inlet
183. c Continental Edison Coship 00142 00713 01743 00173 00658 01099 01100 01113 sus 01300 01334 01672 00642 00879 01333 01433 00497 00642 00863 00879 01176 01259 00710 01457 01659 01111 01412 00455 00775 01457 01284 00173 00713 00713 01232 01366 00710 01251 00658 01672 00847 01175 01662 01847 00713 00847 01175 01662 00710 01296 00713 01284 01645 01672 01743 01811 00853 00853 01622 00853 01339 01853 00853 01457 01413 01567 00216 00123 00710 00713 01085 01334 01626 01718 00299 00394 00818 01075 01176 01232 01672 01413 01367 01232 01366 01412 01413 01700 01695 00394 01695 01457 D Crossdigital Crown Cryptovision Cyfra Cyrus D box Daewoo Delfa Deltasat Dgtec Digenius Digiality Digifusion DigiLogic DigiQuest DigiSat Digisky DigitAll World Digiturk Digiwave Dijam DiPro DirecTV Discovery 01109 01284 00455 00795 01076 00200 00723 00873 01114 00713 01111 01296 01743 00863 01075 01542 01631 01242 00299 01685 01645 01743 01284 00863 01300 01457 01473 01232 01457 01227 01076 01631 01296 01367 01543 01377 00392 00566 00639 01639 01142 00247 00749 01749 00724 00819 01856 01076 01108 00099 01109 01414 01442 01609 01392 01640 00710 Dish Network System 01505 01005 00775 01775 Dishpro Distratel DMT DNT Dream Multimedia DSE
184. cing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface This product should not be placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer s instructions have been adhered to Power Sources This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your product dealer or local power company For products intended to operate from battery power or other sources refer to the operating instructions Grounding or Polarization This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug a plug having one blade wider than the other This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug should still fail to fit contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug FIGURE A EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT NEC SECTION 810 20 ELECTRIC gt GROUNDING CONDUCTORS NEC SECTION 810 21 GROUND CLAMPS z 44 POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NEC ART 250 PART H EQUIPMENT 1 20 21 22 23 24
185. control unit set the remote control unit to the iPod mode IS page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations Either turn SOURCE SELECT gt or press iPod AMP e With the default settings the iPod can be used connected the VCR iPod connector e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound The default setting is Mode3 e Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER OFF and set the AVP A1HDCI s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod Also switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu iPod dock is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod e Depending on the type of iPod and the software version some functions may not operate e DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data Listening to Music Use V to select the menu then press ENTER or gt to select the music file to be played Press ENTER or P Playback starts yoeqheld To pause During playback press ENTER or gt Press again to resume playback Fast forwarding or fast reversing During playback either press and hold A to fast reverse or V to fast forward or press 4 or gt gt To cue to the beginning of a track During playback either press A to cue to the previous track or V to cue to the next track or press kad or D gt To stop During playback either press and hold ENTER or press
186. ctable items A B Start Output test tone A B OFF 12dB 412dB OFF can be set by pressing lt when the subwoofer s volume is set to 12 dB Variable range Default Resets the settings to the default values Operating from the main remote control unit Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the Auto mode and only effective in the STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround and HOME THX CINEMA modes The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory Adjusting using test tones D Press the TEST button Test tones are output from the various speakers 2 Use the 1 gt button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all speakers 3 When the adjustments are completed press the TEST button again e The level of each channel should be adjusted 75 dB Cweighted slow meter mode on a sound level meter at the listening position If a sound level meter Is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same Because adjusting the subwoofer level test tone by ear is difficult use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance e When the GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround Back setting I page 29 is set to 1spkr the surround back speaker display is set to Surround Back e Speakers set to None in the Speaker Configuration settings are not d
187. d Metronic Metz MGA MGN Technology Micro Genius Micromaxx Microstar MicroTEK Midland Mikomi 10047 10000 10060 10706 11254 10035 10037 10017 10264 10035 10037 11037 11454 10556 10009 10714 10499 10053 10009 10264 11037 10487 10371 10208 10036 10250 10773 117 55 11556 10009 10698 10037 10037 10698 11037 10700 10610 10047 11037 10264 10154 10150 10009 10877 10009 10060 10037 10625 10037 10447 11163 10150 10374 10178 10150 10037 11037 10808 10820 10047 11454 10250 10030 11944 10802 10037 10648 10037 10668 11267 10054 10704 10037 10715 10706 10037 10371 10744 10455 10352 10195 10035 10051 11756 11982 10556 10512 10714 11137 10178 10817 10250 10060 10035 11037 10001 10185 10587 10178 10668 10860 10017 11149 10054 10154 10051 10180 10171 10092 11904 11755 10780 10011 10036 10714 10715 10217 10264 10778 10876 10030 10037 10855 10217 10374 10698 10780 10217 10218 10714 10556 10443 10433 10335 10217 10163 10037 10011 10009 10650 10556 10668 10808 10880 11248 11900 10145 10009 10463 10180 10178 10030 10037 10195 11911 10009 10037 10367 10388 10668 10746 10030 10218
188. d connector e Even if iPod dock is set to Assign if the set is not connected to a Control dock for iPod the input source can be used as the normal input source Playback Mode Make settings for NET USB playback NET USB Input source USB Select Select USB port to use Selectable items Rear Match the port be used and the setting Repeat Make settings for repeat mode Selectable items Random Make random mode settings Selectable items ON Direct Play Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit Selectable items All Music Still Picture Make settings for still picture JPEG playback NET USB Input source Slide Show Make slideshow settings Selectable items ON Interval Set the playback time per image Variable range 5s 60s IE Antenna Aiming Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity XM Input source Satellite Indicate satellite signal strength Terrestrial Indicate terrestrial signal strength Display Condition Signal strength is strong Signal strength is Signal strength is marginal Signal strength is weak No signal Surround Mode HOME THX CINEMA THX surround sound mode to recreate the authentic sound of movie soundtracks Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources Selectable items
189. d Bell Panasonic Pioneer Ricavision Samsung Sensory Science Sharp SMC Sony Stack 9 Sylvania Systemax Tagar Systems Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Vizio Voodoo Xbox ZT Group 01272 01120 01010 01272 01190 01126 01010 01456 01272 01272 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01126 01272 01805 01272 Satellite Receiver A sat Sky A Mark ABsat ADB AGS Aiwa Akai Alba Allsat Alltech Allvision AlphaStar Amitronica Amstrad Anglo Ankaro AntSat Apollo Arcon Armstrong Arnion Asat ASCI ASLF AssCom Astacom 01300 01334 00345 00123 00642 01473 00710 01514 00200 00455 01811 00200 00713 01232 00772 00713 00345 00863 01693 00713 00713 01083 00455 01043 00200 01300 00200 01334 00713 00853 00710 01490 01324 01364 01329 00713 01258 01367 01418 01481 00713 01284 01658 01043 01334 01412 00713 00795 00847 00882 01113 01175 01801 01075 Aston Astra Astratec Astro Atlantic Telephone Atsat AtSky Audioline Aurora Austar Axiel Axil Axis B ytronic Beko Bell ExpressVu Big Sat Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blue Sky Boca Boston Brainwave British Sky Broadcasting Broco BskyB BT Bubu Sat Bush Canal Canal Digital Canal Satellite Canal Centrex CGV Chaparral Cherokee Chess Chili CityCom Classic Clatronic CNS Comag Condor Conia Conte
190. d channel separation Neural Surround draws the brain s attention to sonic details in musical instruments vocals and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before As the chosen format for XM satellite Radio s new XM HD surround programming Neural Surround will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other broadcast format XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround music This alone will amount to more than 25 000 hours of Neural Surround music each year neural SURROUND This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation D amp M Holdings Inc hereby grants the user a non exclusive nontransferable limited license right exercisable to use the NA SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents Pending technology Neural and Neural Audio and Neural Surround are trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation All Rights Reserved Audyssey Audyssey MultEQ XT Audyssey MultEQ XT is the first technology to properly measure sound information throughout a listening area then combine this information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in the room Based on these measurements MultEQ XT calculate
191. d polarity are detected at the first measurement position The following attributes are also determined at this time Speaker Size Speaker Distance Channel Level Crossover Frequency Once the measurements are completed the results are displayed e oud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT Automatic Speaker Setup This is part of normal operation If there is background noise in room these test tones will increase in volume e Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made This will cause inaccurate readings e Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and refrain from talking Turn off air conditioning units or other devices that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements e Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after TEPI STEP2 Measurement After completing a measurement position move the microphone to the next position Measure at least 6 positions main listening position and at least 5 other surrounding positions For best results it Is recommend measuring 6 or more positions with a maximum of 8 positions STEP3 Calculation When Calculate is selected at STEP2 the measurements
192. distance from the listening position to the different speakers Feet Meters Select unit for distance Ste Select step smallest distance Selectable items 0 1ft Can be selected when Feet is set 0 01m Can be selected when Meters is set Default Resets the settings to the default values Distance measurement Select the speaker you want to set then set the distance Set the value closest to the measured distance Variable range 0 0ft 60 0ft Display when Feet is set 0 00m 18 00m Display when Meters is set Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm Set the distance between the listening position and the various speakers to no more than 20 ft 6 00 meters El Channel Level Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers Mode Select test tone playback method Selectable items Manual Surround Select surround speaker from which test tone is output Sele
193. dy receiver You can receive a Front panel a Rear panel satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock includes home antenna sold separately and subscribing to the XM service i e Plug the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on USB memory device USB memory device C the rear panel e Position the Home Dock antenna near a south facing window to BE receive the best signal For details see Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs I page 59 When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock 5 5 WLAN SAT TU USB ANTENNA J LOOP COAX a A sevectaate J 1 DVD 2 3 SAT 4 VCR 5 DVR 1 6 SS SS DN inc LINK BNC COAXIAL OPTICAL ETHERNET ADVANCED AL 24 raocnssine XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock ss E um 6 6 UJ N 1 DVD 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 CD 1 TV CBL 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 E S SS 000 DVR 1 MONITOR MONTORE AV SURROUND PRE AMPLIFIER AVP A1HDCI t 00 AUDIO PRE OUT ia ZA ANTENNA SAT XM 75Q HDP 4 CR 5 DVR 6 DVR 2 2 1 zz BNC COAXIAL OPTICAL Je 2 D m w wW Di 2 DVR 1
194. e or receive power e Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port eSet the format to FAT16 or FAT32 For details refer to the USB memory device s operating instructions eWhen divided into multiple partitions only files stored in the top partition can be played e Record the files in a compatible format e Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set e This is not a malfunction On this set characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a period Internet radio cannot be played e Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected e Program is being broadcast in non compatible format e The computers or router s firewall is activated e Radio station is not currently broadcasting e P address is wrong Symptom e Check the connection status e Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set e Check the computer s or router s firewall settings e Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting e Check the set s IP address Files stored on a computer cannot be played Server is not found or it is not possible to connect to the Server Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations For some radio stations Server Full or Connection Down 15 displayed and station cannot be connected to Sound is broken during playback Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy eFi
195. e tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theater a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience while in a home theater there are usually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater THX Ultra2 Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier performance pre amplifier performance and operation as well as hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect t
196. e value set at GUI menu Manual Setup Zone Setup select the zone Volume Limit 87 page 38 e The volume for ZONE2 and ZONES can be adjusted with the remote control unit Turning off the Sound Temporarily In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound press MUTE The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu Manual Setup Zone Setup select the zone Mute Level I page 38 To cancel either adjust the volume or press MUTE again The setting is canceled when the zone s power is turned off e The source selected for ZONE3 is also output from the recording output connectors e When the MENU is selected it is possible to carryout Zone Setup looking at the on screen display in ZONE2 Also when the OSD is set as ZONE2 ZONE3 the on screen display comes on the ZONE2 monitor when ZONES has been operated so it is possible to operate it looking at this INPUT DVD SIGNAL ANALOG VOL 40dB 4STEREOP 4 VAR P gt Bass 4 OdBI 4 OFF gt Treble 4 OdBI LAST HPF P OFF Mute Lev 4 FULLD Lch Lev 4 OdBI 4 Rch Lev 4 0dB e The digital signal from the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are output to the analog audio connectors in ZONE2 and ZONES in the case of PCM 2 channel signals only e Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi zone e XM or HD Radio cannot be selected with digital
197. ed in Japan OOD 511 4654 004
198. elect the input source GUI Source Select 125 page 43 Start playback I See the operating instructions of the respective devices 56 yoeqdeld 20 D lt o D e TUNING PRESET gt SOURCE SELECT AV eS zJ CL c Ty pEv1 mode mes A G BAND p MEMO pm TN Ear MODE Cr AV SEARCH amp CHANNEL TUNER AMP mode SHIFT About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 57 Listening to FM AM Broadcasts Basic Operation Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press TUNER AMP mode to select TUNER GUI Source Select iz amp page 43 To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the TUNER DEv1 mode Is page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Press BAND to select FM or AM 4 Tune in the desired broadcast station DTo tune in automatically Auto Tuning Press MODE to light the AUTO indicator on the display then use A Y to select the station you want to hear 2 To tune in manually Manual Tuning Press MODE to turn off the display s AUTO indicator then use A V to select the station you want to hear e t is also possible to switch to
199. ended Use for wired LAN e he AVP A1HDCI does not come with an Ethernet cable e Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise We recommend using a normal type cable e f the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network environment use a shielded type Ethernet cable i Computer A computer with the following specifications is required to use a media server e OS Windows XP Service Pack2 Windows Vista e Software Prepare one of the following NET Framework 1 1 and Windows Media Connect Windows XP Windows Media Player ver 11 DLNA compatible server software e Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or later e AN port e 300 MB or more free disk space X Free disk space is required to store music and video files The following sizes are approximate Bit rate 128 kbps 192 kbps 256 kbps Approx 2MB Approx 120 MB 392 kbps Approx 3MB Approx 600MB Approx 464 MB MP3 WMA MPEG 4 AAC I For connections to the Internet contact an ISP Internet Service Provider or a computer shop e A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet e The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details e Depending on the server video files may be displayed
200. enner 10009 10374 mem 11371 10773 11196 11269 10037 10217 10264 10455 Jinxing 10037 10264 10556 10698 Ferd 10335 Giant 10009 10217 Harwood 10009 10037 10487 eo TT TES vum m MM Gibralter 10017 10000 10030 Hauppauge 10037 10849 10860 10865 10876 EXIGEN Te 10195 10287 10335 10343 ppaug Hyundai p JNC 10876 9 10443 10548 10560 10625 Go Video 10060 10886 Havermy 10093 Jocel 10712 11037 Emma m m 10009 10037 10217 10218 1 Iberia T Fidelit 10264 10418 ICE 10037 10217 10218 10264 ohnson y 10264 10361 10371 10512 Goldfunk 10668 Heathkit 10017 10371 Jubilee 10556 Filsai 10217 10047 10054 10154 10178 ICeS 10218 Hel 10865 Juhua 10264 10817 10163 10208 10346 10361 Mt i Finlandia GoldStar 10455 10361 10217 10163 Hello Kitty 10451 iyama 10877 11217 Jutan 10030 10109 10073 10037 10036 10009 10001 PRESET CODE 6 JVC K Kaige Kalsul Kambrook Kamp Kangli Kangyi Kapsch Karcher Kathrein Kawa Kawasho KB Aristocrat KDS KEC Kendo Kennedy Kennex Kenwood Khind KIC Kiota Kioto Kiton KLH KLL Kloss Kneissel Kolin Kolster Kongque Konichi Konig Konka Kontakt Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda Kreisen KTV Kuaile Kulun Kunlun 10054 10030 10371 10650 11253 10009 10009 10455 10217 10017 10001 10661 10009 10163 10264 10714 10556 10371
201. enney 21237 H Hitachi 11960 F Ferguson 30695 30713 30884 E Emerson 10236 10463 11909 11911 Audiovox 20278 Philips 20081 J JDV 11982 Funai 31268 F Ferguson 10073 10625 B Beko 20104 Portland 20637 Jensen 11933 G Goodmans 30713 Fidelity 10171 Bestar 20278 Quasar 20035 20162 21035721162 K KLH 11962 Grandin 30713 Funai 11904 Blue Sky 20278 20352 20742 R Radiola 20081 L Lenco 10587 Grundig 30539 30695 c E WE ROME HEC ODE BPL 20046 RadioShack 20000 Logik 11037 H Hitachi 31247 TET TE Broksonic 20002 20479 21479 RCA XT To 20240 Luker 11982 Insignia 31268 Papapa 10374 11909 ii EN SEE 20320 M s Wm i E a n TAE 20035 21035 MM H Harley Davidson 11904 Sansui 20000 20479 21479 Maxim 11982 K Konka 31192 Hinari m D Daewoo 20278 20637 21278 Sam 20240 L a Hitachi s Te saul me BET 0 a _ internal 11909 E Emerson 21278 21479 Schneider 20081 20000 Lise 11923 F Ferguson 20000 20278 Sears 20037 20000 21237 Narita _ 11982 M Magnavox ds L 16 10178 Fidelity 20000 SEG 20637 P Lloyd s 11904 Firstline 20278 Sharp 20037 20048 20807 Philips _ 11454 10556 11961 Maxim 31367 Magnavox TEET una 2008 Shivaki 20037 Powerpoint 10698 N Naiko 31367 10250 G 20060 20035 20048 20240 Siemens 20081 Prima 11933 Acts 31367 Mitsubishi 10093 10556 11917 20807 21035 21060 Sinudyne 20352 R RCA 11948 11958 Neovia 31271 0 mm GoldStar 20037 20480 21237 cm SE
202. et XLR Out Polarity or operated To return to the previous item press the lt or RETURN button Example of Display of Default Values Operation button guidance Guidance text for item at cursor position 3 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges the surrounded by a border is the default value 4 Press the MENU button to finish Selectable items 9 1 7 1 5 1 24 Information I page 54 55 J Status e MAIN ZONE e ZONE2 3 4 Audio Input Signal HDMI Information J Auto Surround Mode Quick Select Preset Station Parameter I page 50 54 Audio e Surround Parameters Mode Decoder Cinema DRC D COMP LFE Center Image Panorama Dimension Center Width Delay Time Effect Effect Level Room Size AFDM SB CH Out Input Channel Subwoofer Att Subwoofer Default e Tone Tone Defeat Bass Treble Front Center Surround Surround Back Subwoofer e Room EQ Dynamic RESTORER Night Mode e Audio Delay 2 Picture Adjust Contrast e Brightness e Chroma Level e Hue e DNR e Enhancer e Sharpness 25 Source Select 127 page 43 47 _J TUNER FM AM PHONO Play Video e Auto Preset Video Select e Preset Skip i p Scaler e Preset Name Video Input Mode Video Select e Rename i p Scaler e Source Level Res
203. etup Color Space RGB Range Auto Lip Sync EW Audio Monitor Out O HDMI Control EN Color Space Make settings for output color space Selectable items YCbCr RGB When connected to a monitor with a DVI D connector HDCP compatible using an HDMI DVI converter cable the signals are output in RGB format regardless of this setting RGB Range Make settings for RGB output range Selectable items Enhanced When YCbCr is selected under Color Space RGB Range will have no effect Auto Lip Sync Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output Selectable items OFF Audio Select HDMI audio output device Selectable items TV GUI menu HDMI Control Control is ON the Amp TV will switch with the operation of any television not related to this setting Monitor Out Make settings for HDMI monitor output Selectable items Auto Dual Monitor1 Monitor 2 X Operating from the main remote control unit Press the M SEL button T Auto Dual Monitor 1 Monitor 2 eWhen Monitor Out is set to Auto Dual the MONITOR 1 automatically elf both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and Resolution is set to Auto 157 page 45 the signals are output with a resolution compatible with both monitors elf Resolution is set to something other than Auto check the
204. f message in the front panel display which will read Dial Norm X dB X being a numeric value The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels you may wish to adjust the volume For example if you see the following message Dial Norm 4 dB in the front panel display to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness just turn down the volume control by 4 dB However unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment 55 IS HDMI Information Shows information about HDMI input output signals and monitor Menutree HDMI Information Signal Information Monitor1 Monitor2 EN Signal Information The HDMI input output signal information is displayed Items to be checked Resolution ColorSpace Pixel Depth Monitor1 The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed Monitor2 The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed Items to be checked Interface Supported resol Auto Surround Mode Shows information about auto surround mode settings The surround mode for which the last memory function was used for the different input signal types is displayed Menu tree Auto Surround Mode Items to be checked Analog PCM 2ch Digital2ch Digital 51 Multi ch Quick Select Shows information about Quick Select
205. for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI Deep Color Eliminates on screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors Enables increased contrast ratio Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white At 30 bit pixel depth a four times improvement would be the minimum and the typical improvement would be eight times or more xvYCC Next generation xvYCC color space supports 1 8 times as many colors as existing HDTV signals Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately Enables displays with natural vivid colors Lip Sync Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of the content synchronization of video and audio in user devices has become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end user adjustments HDMI 1 3 incorporates an automatic video audio synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically with total accuracy HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC 89 Surround Modes and Parameters Surround Mode PURE DIRECT DIRECT DSD DIRECT DSD MULTI DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT STEREO EXT IN MULTI CH IN WIDE SCREEN HOME THX CINEMA 2ch HOME THX CINEMA 5 chi
206. g control operations POA A1HDCI channel input selection and power amp settings e Link POA A1HDCI to AVP A1HDCI On Standby control Link POA A1HDCI meter operation to AVP A1HDCI display on off control IG page 42 Updating POA A1HDCI firmware IGS page 42 e Up to 2 POA A1HDCI units can be connected Refer to the POA A1HDCI owner s manual for making connections and POA A1HDCI settings e For instructions for connecting speakers please refer to the POA A1HDCI owner s manual e When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the left channel SBL 10 5 5 p 5 o Connections When using Subwoofer 2 or 3 set GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Subwoofer Setup I page 29 I Connecting the RCA pre out terminal Example 9 3 channels Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 3 e 5 5 o XL Left Subwoofer Right with built in amplifier AVP A1HDCI AUDIO 1 GROUND rj IN 983 Z 2 2 9 IHOTE PHONO CY 3 INVERTI CONTROL LINK 2 3 HOT COLD SELECTABLE AUDIO ooooo 6 oooo ooo0 5 RS 232C AN q STRAIGHT CABLE SES 93 SW2 TONES SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A AC OUTLETS AC 120V 60Hz AUDIC
207. gital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio all points of the surround field ASA Advanced Speaker Array ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart you will need to go THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three new modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode Boundary Gain Compensation If your chosen listening room layout for practical or aesthetic reasons results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes boomy THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC Boundary Gain Compensation feature to provide an imp
208. gt during playback in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS Surround mode When this is done signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode are automatically output from the recording output terminals analog and digital and can be recorded Select the parameters and set the desired mode Start recording Refer to the Dolby Headphone IG page 49 Do not disconnect the headphones during recording Convenient Functions HDMI Control Function When connecting the AVP A1HDCI to a television or player compatible with the HDMI control function the following operations are possible e Turn power ON OFF Synchronize with television e Switch to sound output equipment TV and AVP A1HDCI e Adjust volume e Switch input source e When using these functions set as follows GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Control 87 page 32 e When using these functions do not assign the HDMI to TV CBL yoeqheld Connections Player compatible with HDMI control function Television compatible with HDMI control function AUDIO AUDIO OPTICAL HDMI HDMI OUT ru DENON LINK BNC 9 wm ii 96 3 x M en DO0 HDP B CB PR CR T I 3 DVR 2 4 VCR 2 e 1 TV CBL 2 DVR 1 DVR 1 VR 2 PB CB PR CR AAR INVERTI COLD ooooo
209. h similar equipment and conditions The soundtrack created for movie theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On the AVP A1HDCI when the Home THX Cinema mode is on THX post processing is automatically added after the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital or DTS decoder Re EQ Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack in a normal home environment 86 5 A 5 l 5 Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theater there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theater only two speakers located to the side of your head are used The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match th
210. he sub remote control unit Selectable items ON GUI Source Select NET USB Playback Mode Random 1257 page 47 The repeat mode and random mode can only be used when playing tracks recorded in USB Media Server Rhapsody To pause During playback press ENTER Press again to resume playback To stop During the play or pause mode press and hold ENTER Searching up or down pages Press SEARCH then press lt down or gt up To cancel press AV or SEARCH Searching by first letter Character search This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer D When the menu screen is displayed press SEARCH twice 2 Use 1 D to select the first letter you want to search for If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter they are displayed in alphabetical order If it is not possible to search the list unsorted list is displayed To cancel press or AV or SEARCH e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound The default setting is Mode3 e The time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI NET USB IG page 40 Use lt STATUS gt to switch between displaying the title name artist name or album name z z P ing Internet Radio St
211. honic agnin Oe L T Teac 10178 10171 Matsui 20352 20742 TV VCR DVD somainaton i Apex Digital 30830 TV VCR Combination X2 X3 X4 TE 20037 21162 21237 X2 Black Diamond 30713 30884 T emorex i Broksonic 30695 P Aiwa 11904 11911 nay MGA 1m em Y Bush 30713 30884 Rescue ana uus Mitsubishi 20048 20081 20043 20807 Emerson YES C Centrum 30713 Amstrad 10171 Westinghouse Optimus 20162 21162 21262 ESA 11944 Citizen 30695 ramai 10180 Z Zenith 11904 11909 11911 ERR ee 2o uu 11944 2001 30713 Beko 10486 x3 P Pace 20352 P Panasonic 11946 11947 D D Vision 31367 Black Diamond 11909 Awa 20000 20352 20479 20742 prm 20742 R RCA 11953 21137 PRESET CODE 10 S Sharp Sylvania Symphonic T Toshiba X3 S Sharp X4 Akai Emerson ESA Magnavox Panasonic RCA Sharp Superscan Sylvania Symphonic T Toshiba an T MDP A A Mark ABS Admira Adventura Aiko Aim Aiwa Akal Akura Alba Alienware Allegro Allorgan Allstar America Action American High Amoisonic Amstrad Anam Anam National Ansonic Aristona ASA Asha Astra Asuka 11917 11944 11944 11945 20807 30899 30821 30821 30821 31362 31132 30630 30821 30821 30821 31045 20037 20046 21972 20060 20104 20037 20278 20278 20037 20041 20742 20037 20315 20041 20081 20315 21972 20039 20240 20081 20278 20035 20479 20000 20162 20226 20162 2000
212. hrough 4 4 gt 1 lt 4 PPI Il 5 Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through TV or SAT CBL Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 3 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight on time setting mode 15 set Set the light on time The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Settable times 1 5 sec 2 10 sec Default 3 15 sec 4 20 sec 5 25 sec Adjusting the Backlight s Brightness The display s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps Default Step 3 Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press CHANNEL or CHANNEL The display gets one step brighter when is pressed The display gets one step darker when is pressed 3 Press RC SETUP to complete the setting Learning Function Resetting button by button Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission
213. ints throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction Auto setup flow STEP1 Speaker Detection Example 1 Example 2 STEP2 Measurement 2 to 8 positions STEP3 Calculation X t is not recommended to hold it in your hand Be sure that the path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects STEP4 Check Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results STEP5 Store When using subwoofer make the following settings before starting The main listening position refers to the most central position where Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible one would normally sit within the listening environment e f this is not possible then set MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate Volume 12 o clock position speaker distance level polarity and the optimum crossover value Crossover frequency Maximum Highest Frequency for the subwoofer Low pass filter Off Standby mode Off make manual adjustments to the settings see pages 29 31 eDo not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed e When using headphones unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure 26 Start Start Auto Setup The Audyssey MultEO XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates the size level distance bass management cro
214. io A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the AVP A1HDCI Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected Also files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD etc on a computer may be copyright protected depending on the computer s settings X Media server and USB eThe AVP A1HDCI is compatible with ID3 Tag Ver 2 standards e The AVP A1HDCI is compatible with WMA META tags Playable formats i abi Bitrate Extension ino frequency WMA WINCOWS 39744 1 48 kHz 48 192 kbps mp3 Media Audio MPEG 1 39 44 1 48 kHz 32 320 kbps Audio Layer 3 WAV MPEG 4 AAC FLAC Free Lossless Audio Codec 32 44 1 48 kHz Wav 32 44 1 48 kHz 16 320 kbps aac m4a mp4 32 44 1 48 kHz flac WAV format Quantization bit rate 16 bits 1 Rhapsody Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks When you first listen to Rhapsody take advantage of the 30 day free trial When the free trial period has expired it is necessary to subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage and register this machine See the Rhapsody homepage for details www rhapsody com denon signup 64 yoeqdeld v tb lt c SOURCE SELECT ENTER AV lt lt STATUS gt
215. ion information volume expansion In addition to the existing AL24 Processing Plus bit expansion technology DENON has also developed Advanced AL24 Processing that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region using high speed signal detection and processing technology In addition to expanding original 16 bit digital data to 24 bits Advanced AL24 Processing uses data interpolation along the time axis or up converted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the original data A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing free pulse response pulsive music data and attack sounds This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the delicate nuances in the music the positions of the performers and the breadth height and depth of the concert hall Advanced AL24 Processing is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD DIRECT 88 3 a 5 l 5 HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based on DVI Digital Visual Interface standards and optimized for use in consumer equipment Non compressed digital video and multi channel audio signals are transmitted with a single connection HDMI is also compatible with HDCP High bandwidth Digital Contents Protection a technology
216. ise in the room for accurate e Either turn off any device generating noise or move it or Level is too low measurements to be made away e Try again when the surroundings are quieter e Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for e Check the speaker installation and the direction in which accurate measurements to be made the speakers are facing e Adjust the subwoofer s volume None e Displayed speaker could not be detected e Check the connections of the displayed speaker he front R speaker was not properly detected Only one channel of the surround A and surround B speakers was detected Sound was output from the R channel when only one surround back speaker was connected The surround back or the surround B speaker was detected but the surround A speaker was not detected When the subwoofer configuration is set at 25 Zor MIX or the subwoofer could not be detected Phase e Displayed speaker connected with the polarities e Check the polarities of the displayed speaker reversed e f the XLR pre out terminal is used the polarity 15 Check the polarity setting for the XLR output of the reversed displayed pre set channel e For some speakers this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected If you are sure that the wiring is correct select Skip e Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the inte
217. isplayed e Surround can be set when GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround B is set to Large or Small 87 page 29 e When using surround speakers be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers e When Channel Level is adjusted the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes use the operation see page 72 Crossover Frequency Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal Selectable items FIXED THX Setup when using a THX certified speaker 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 200Hz 250Hz Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using 110Hz 12092 150Hz Advanced Specify crossover frequency for each speaker 30 e Please set all THX Certified speakers set the Speaker Configuration for all speakers to Small We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to FIXED THX but depending on the speaker setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency e The Crossover Frequency can be set when there are speakers that have been set to Small at GUI menu Speaker Configuration or when Subwoofer is set to Yes
218. k setting ill Assign Assign input sources to input connectors Select HDMI connector to assign to this source Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items 1 2 3 4 5 6 Inputsouce DvD HDP TV OBL SAT _ Default setting HDMI2 Non HDMI3 Input source VCR 071 DVR2 vaux Default setting HDMI5 HDMI Noe None e With an HDMI connection video and audio signals transmitted simultaneously To play the video signal assigned at HDMI combined with the audio signal assigned at Digital select Digital at the GUI menu Source Select Input Mode I page 45 e When the AVP A1HDCI and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback only the video signals are output to the monitor e The audio signals input from the analog digital and EXT IN connectors are not output to the monitor NOTE This cannot be set for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned Digital Select digital input connector to assign to this source Input source CD DVD HDP TV CBL V AUX VCR DVR 2 SAT DVR 1 Selectable items Coaxiall 4 Opticall 5 DENONLINK BNC1 2 When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure t
219. kHz Variable range 20dB OdB 6dB Curve Copy Copy the Room EQ s Audyssey Flat correction curve Selectable items Yes No Curve Copy is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been performed Default Resets the settings to the default values 34 Network Setup Make network settings Menutree Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Other Network Information 35 Ell Network Setup Make settings for wired or wireless LAN Wired LAN settings Make settings for wired LAN Turn on the AVP A1HDCI s power If a Ethernet cable is connected The mode automatically switches to Wired To enter the IP address manually To acquire the IP address automatically using the DHCP function At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Detail setting set DHCP to OFF and enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway primary DNS and secondary DNS To not pass through the proxy server When a proxy server is used This setting is required when the network Is established via proxy servers At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Detail Proxy setting set Proxy to ON and enter the address or domain name and port numbers This completes the setting Recheck the connections and settings if you cannot connect to the Internet I page 21 NO NB Knowledge about netw
220. l Control Monitor 32 set for the monitor output connected to television e s the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Control Power Off Control I page 32 set to ON e 5 the control function used for the television HDMI properly set Check the television operating instructions for details e Should any of the operations below be performed the interlocking function may be reset in which case repeat Operation s 2 and 3 GUI menu Source Select input source Assign HDMI I page 46 setting has changed here is a change to the connection between the equipment and the HDMI or an increase in equipment Change of HDMI monitor output in AVP A1HDCI setup Channel Level You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste as described below 1 Press CH SELECT Use AV or CH SELECT to select the speaker The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed 3 Use 1 gt to adjust the volume OFF can be set by pressing lt when the subwoofer s volume is set to 12dB Fader Function This function lets you adjust fade the sound from all the front or rear speakers at once 1 Press CH SELECT Quick Select Function With this function the currently playing input source input mode surround mode room EQ settings and volume can
221. l audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors are not output to the REC OUT connectors so connect using the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors e Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE3 as well e n the REC OUT mode the remote control units ZONE3 mode buttons cannot be operated e When the Digital Out setting is set to ZONE4 Select the OPTICAL4 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output When using for recording set to Rec Select e Copyright protected network audio Internet radio media server USB and Rhapsody signals cannot be output from the digital output connectors OPTICAL e Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder e When DENON LINK is assigned at the GUI menu Assign setting the PCM signals network audio signals Internet radio media server USB and Rhapsody XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT connectors e Input sources for which Delete is selected at Source Delete cannot be selected Dolby Headphone recording When REC OUT mode is set to SOURCE with the AVP A1HDCI it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when headphones are connected to lt PHONES
222. lashes twice and the system call registration mode is set Press SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 at which you want to register the signals 5 Press the buttons you want to register in the same sequence as the operations you want to perform he signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed Example Press POWER ON V Press MODE SELECTOR DVD Press gt The mode can be switched by pressing MODE SELECTOR X Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to register Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed Calling out 1 Press AMP to select SYSTEM CALL Press SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 at which the signals were registered The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence Punch Through Function CD DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT CBL mode buttons For example when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through CD DVD or VCR Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch through setting mode is set Press the button you want to punch t
223. ld with a three dimensional feeling sense of distance movement and positioning is achieved A real overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7 1 channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7 1 channels so it is used for applications particularly prioritizing sound quality Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater to create a three dimensional sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a further impro
224. le Playing Dolby Digital software with EX flag e When AFDM is set to ON the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY D PLIIx C mode e To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode set AFDM to OFF and SB CH Out to MIRX ON Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when AFDM is set to ON set SB CH Out to MTRX ON or PLIIx CINEMA SB CH Out for Multi channel sources Select playback mode for surround back channels Selectable items NON MTRX MTRXON PLIIx CINEMA MUSIC 2 ES MTRX ESDSCRT DSCRTON OFF 1 This can be selected when Surround Back is set to 2spkrs at the GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration setting I page 29 2 This can be selected when Surround Back is set to 2spkrs or 1spkr at the GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration setting 3 This can be selected when playing DTS sources 4 This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a discrete 6 1 channel signal identification signal SB CH Out for 2 channel sources Determine whether to use surround back speakers Selectable items ON OFF Input Channel Select channel using external input connectors EXT IN for source being played Selectable items 2CH Can be selected when GUI menu Manual Setup Audio Setup EXT IN Set
225. lectable items 1ft 4ft Over 4ft e When two surround back speakers have been set in Speaker Configuration IS page 29 set the distance of the speakers This option is not available when 1spkr is selected e his setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Surround Speaker Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode THX DOLBY DTS Cinema Selectable items A B A B THX DOLBY DTS Music Selectable items A B A B THX DOLBY Game Selectable items A B A B WIDE SCREEN Selectable items A B A B 7CH STEREO Selectable items A B A B DSP SIMULATION Selectable items A B A B MULTI CH MODE Selectable items A B A B Operating from the main remote control unit Press the SPKR button Surround A Surround B Surround A B _ e This can be set when GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround A and Surround B are used Ie page 29 e Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to EXT IN at GUI menu Manual Setup Audio Setup EXT IN Setup I page 33 About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Surround speakers A and B If Small is set for either surround speakers A or B the output is the same as when Small is set for both A and B HDMI Setup Make settings for HDMI video audio output Menutree Manual S
226. les are stored in a non compatible format e You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected e Set and computer are connected by USB cable e The computers or router s firewall is activated e Computer s power is not turned on e Server is not running e Set s IP address is wrong e Radio station is not currently broadcasting e Hadio station is not currently in service e Station is congested or not currently broadcasting e Network s signal transfer speed Is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested e File being played has a low bit e Record in a compatible format e Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set sets USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer e Check the computer s or router s firewall settings e Turn on the power e aunch the server e Check the set s IP address e Wait a while before trying again e t is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer In service e Wait a while before trying again e his is not a malfunction When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate the sound may be broken depending on the communications conditions e his is not a malfunction Symptom eCheck if the Username for Rhapsody has been properly entered e Re enter the Password Password is not displayed e Get a full account www rhapsody com denon signup e Get a full account
227. ls the surround effect of conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources can also be enhanced Speaker s for one or two channels are required in order to achieve a THX Surround EX system with the AVP A1HDCI Adding these however allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only with sources recorded in THX Surround EX but also with conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 7 1 channels using surround back speakers for sources recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and DTS Surround 5 1 channel sources Furthermore all the DENON original surround modes 87 49 DSP Simulation Playback are compatible with 7 1 channel playback so you can enjoy 7 1 channel sound with any signal source Number of surround back speakers With THX Surround EX the surround back channel consists of one channel of playback signals but we recommend using two speakers The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX I page 87 are most effective when using two monopole type surround back speakers placed close together Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back channel when listening from a position other than the center Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers Using surround back speakers greatly impro
228. ls in the DIRECT mode DSD MULTI DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD multi channel signals in the DIRECT mode e The DSD signal may not be output depending on the equipment that is connected For further details refer to the user manual for the equipment being used Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode You can listen to one program source while recording a different program source Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT gt ZONES SOURCE is shown on the display Turn SOURCE SELECT until RECOUT SOURCE is displayed The indicator lights ZONE3 SOURCE ZONE3 TUNER lt lt ZONE3 HD Radio RECOUT HD Radio RECOUT XM lt lt RECOUT SOURCE Turn SOURCE SELECT gt to choose the input source to be recorded Play the program source For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions To record FM or AM broadcasts select the broadcast 87 page 57 Start recording For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions e To cancel press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT then turn SOURCE SELECT until ZONE3 SOURCE is displayed e Make a test recording before starting the actual recording e Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are PCM 2 channel signals e Digita
229. mA A Accuphase Acorn Action Active ADB Aichi Denshi Americast Amstrad Archer Auna Austar BCC Bell South Bestlink Birmingham Cable Communications British Telecom Cable amp Wireless Century Coship Daehan Daeryung Digeo Director DX Antenna Emerson Encon Fosgate Foxtel France Telecom ist of preset codes 81001 82001 83001 84001 92863 52 95 52800 52805 52864 52812 52813 52814 Denon Digital Tuner D Denon NET 62865 62837 62838 62839 62840 62841 62842 62843 72815 72816 72817 72818 00008 00144 00237 00003 00008 00003 00237 00237 00237 01230 01512 00899 01222 00237 01230 00276 00276 00899 00303 00276 00003 01068 00008 01462 00778 01877 00877 00477 00008 01187 00476 01500 00303 00008 00276 01222 00817 1 PRESET CODE G Freebox Fujitsu Galaxi GE Gehua General Instrument Gibralter GNI GoldStar Hitachi Hongtian Jiangsu Hwalin Insight Jerrold Jiuzhou KNC LG Macab Madritel Maspro Matav Memorex Mitsubishi Motorola MS NEC Noos Nova Vision Novaplex NIL Oak Ono Optus Pace Panasonic Paragon Penney Philips Pioneer Pulsar PVP Stereo Visual Matrix Quasar RadioShack Regal Runco Sagem Salora Samsung 01482 01497 00008 00237 00144 00476 00476 00810 00003 01466 00144 00003 00008 01462 00303 00476 00810 00476 00810 01445 00008 00144
230. me and port numbers Without security With security This completes the setting x This is the flow for infrastructure type communications For ad hoc communications set Mode at the Detail settings to Ad hoc Input the encryption key For WEP also input the default key 0180 Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings For details consult a network administrator Connection continued on right page 36 Other Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language environment Power Saving Make setting for power saving when not connected to network Selectable items OFF use the web control function set this setting to OFF Character Set the character code type of the ID3 Tag played by USB Selectable items Auto Latin Japanese If the characters not properly displayed when set Auto set to Latin or Japanese PC Language Select computer environment language Selectable items ara chi smpl chi trad cze dan dut fin fre ger gre heb hun ita jpn kor pol por por BR rus spa swe tur 37 Rhapsody Account Set or change Username and Password Listening to Rhapsody IG page 00 J Enter username Username Input characters a z A Z 0 9 8 4 lt gt space Enter password Password Input characters a z A Z 0 9 I 95 a
231. mend using the AC adapter elt is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVP A1HDCI s USB port using a USB cable e The AVP A1HDCI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle Listening to Rhapsody Preparations Use A V to select Rhapsody then press ENTER or Be Use V to select I have a Rhapsody account or Start 30 day free trial then press ENTER or b D When selecting I have a Rhapsody account Enter Username and Password Select OK then press ENTER 2 When selecting Start 30 day free trial Select Accept then press ENTER X To cancel select Reject then press ENTER Username Input characters a z A Z 0 9 amp lt gt _ space Password Input characters a z A Z 0 9 8 4 lt gt N F space e The password should be no longer than 99 characters e The password may not contain underscores _ Search From Rhapsody Latest Information Use AV to select Rhapsody Music Guide then press ENTER or Pb Use A V to select the information for track selection then press ENTER or b After selecting the information is displayed 3 Use A V to select the track then press ENTER or b Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to Listen to 1 Use AV to select Search then press ENTER or b Use A V to select the search item then press ENTER or gt The search display appears X You can
232. mp lt gt N F space Clear Rhapsody account Clear Selectable items Yes No d he Account Number received is displayed during the 30 day free trial Network Information Display network information Items to be checked Wired or Wireless SSID DHCP ON or OFF Address MAC Address Zone Setup Gul Make settings for audio playback in a multi zone E system Menu tree Manual Setup Zone Setup ZONE2 ZONE3 OSD EN ZONE2 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system ZONE3 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system Bass Adjust low frequency range bass Variable range 10dB OdB 10dB Treble Adjust high frequency range treble Variable range 10dB OdB 10dB HPF When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting HPF to ON Selectable items ON Lch Level Adjust the left channel output level Variable range 12dB 0dB 12dB The Lch Level and Rch Level can be set when Channel is set to Stereo Rch Level Adjust the right channel output level Variable range 12dB 12dB Channel Switch between stereo and mono output Selectable items Mono Volume Level Adjust the main volume level Selectable items 40dB OdB Volume Limit Make a setting for ma
233. n THX Audio Setup nr E eee eae 31 Surround Speaker Pe eee UPR RIA Ea TERRE ORR MTR msn 31 HDMI Setup x E Merc xTM rU acre 82 Color Space m RUM M M CZ RGB Range 32 Auto Lip Sync 4 22 Monitor OUt eee e E E as ss Bs 2 n Pp Vs sae T ULL T 32 Audio Setup ut cM M E 33 El EXT IN Setup e uma 33 2ch Direct Stereo eee 33 Downmix Option hapas ga ier Tae IM 34 n A to Surrounad Mode 34 Manual EO nn n 5 ef D as URS nu cnr 34 Network Setup M ee ree a maa Mp EEUU EE NE ET 35 El Network Setup TURON DEI EI 35 36 LLL 97 NetworlkclbtervatioEisssss es Fa ral nte repe da e s 37 Zone Setup Naas MRR REM E TM 37 c I M I 37 38 Ng e eet ern TTS 37 38 o moe EUM MEL 38 Option Setup t ICE nasa 38 Pre out Assign UE 39 XLR Out Polarity ppc a re its 39 POA Setting easier iste 39 40 El Volume cement 40 Source Delete e I ELE EINE 40 6 Een 40 Ouick nn nn n Ds 40 Trigger 41 EI Trigger 41 10 Trigger COLUIT Bien VLA EEE S 41 Trigger a Transducer Setup d M M
234. n the main remote control will switch between the following DVD HDP VD HDP VCR DVR 7 VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 Settings Related to Playing Input Sources Menu tree Input Att eiu Play and Playback Mode iPod are displayed for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned Play The playback screen is displayed Input source TUNER NETJUSB HD Radio iPod Auto Preset Use the auto preset function to program radio stations TUNER Input source HD Radio Selectable items Start If an FM station cannot be preset automatically select the desired station by tuning it manually then preset it manually Preset Skip Set the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning A G Select the preset channel s you do not want to display TUNER HD Radio XM Input source Selectable items All 12 E30 0 5 7X EB Selectable items Skip When set to All to Skip it is possible to skip entire preset memory blocks A to G Preset Name Assign name to a preset memory Names containing up to 8 characters can be input 1 G8 Select the preset memory number TUNER HD Radio Input source Characters that can be input A Z a z 0 9 amp 4 3 lt gt 7 s
235. nd Back Input Select surround back channel input in combination with the connected player Selectable items SBL SBR SB SBL I This can be set when Mode is set to DSP 33 Surround Speaker Select the surround speakers to use Selectable items A B A B e This can be set when Mode is set to Analog e This can be set when GUI menu Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration Surround A and Surround B are used I page 29 Subwoofer Level Set the subwoofer level for playback Select according to the player in use 5dB 10dB 15dB Selectable items 0dB We recommend setting to 15 dB Input Att Setup when input level is too large and playback volume is distorted Selectable items 6dB This be set when Mode is set to DSP 2ch Direct Stereo Make speaker settings for 2 channel mode playback Setting _ To change the settings select Custom Selectable items Basic Custom Use the same settings as in Speaker Setup Front Select front speaker size Selectable items Large Subwoofer Select subwoofer use Selectable items No Subwoofer Mode Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer Selectable items LFE THX LFE Main Crossover Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal Selectable items 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz
236. ns Picture cannot be recorded DVDs cannot be copied on a VCR e The format of the GUI and TV NTSC or PAL do not match e The connections between the AVP A1HDCI and monitor are faulty e The monitors input setting is wrong e PURE DIRECT mode is set e The player is connected using the component input connectors the monitor is connected using the video yellow or S Video output connectors e The connections to the HDMI connectors are faulty e HDMI input setting is improper e The monitor is not compatible with copyright protection HDCP e The HDMI format of the player and monitor do not match e nput source does not match recorders video connection connector video or S Video e Match the format of the GUI and TV e Check the connections e Set properly e Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode e High definition 1080i 720p and progressive 480p b76p video signals are not down converted Set the player to interlace 4801 5761 signals e Check the connections e Check the HDMI input setting e Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection HDCP e Match the HDMI format of the player and monitor e The video conversion function does not work for the REC OUT connectors Match the input source and recorder connections e This is not a malfunction Most movie software includes copy prevention signals and cannot be copied 12 46 12 12 16 17 100 Buijoous lqno
237. nt Maxim Maya MBO McIntosh MDS Mecotek Medion Memorex Metronic Metz MiCO Micromaxx Micromedia Micromega Microsoft Microstar Minato Minax Minerva Minoka Mintek Mirror 30591 30741 30790 30869 31906 30651 30831 31347 30768 31104 31058 31158 30713 30539 30511 30741 30885 30713 30884 30705 30783 31367 30695 30705 30713 30741 Gill TESTS la 30741 30573 30713 31004 31695 31730 30651 30675 31923 30503 30539 30646 30675 30713 30821 30885 31140 31268 30723 31345 30705 30713 30503 30539 30675 30713 30770 30672 30651 30695 30713 30884 31004 31695 31730 30788 31347 90715590972491997 31345 30690 30730 31730 31533 30713 30770 30651 30630 30774 30783 30831 31006 31270 31345 31347 31423 30790 30690 30695 30831 31270 30690 30625 30571 30713 30723 30751 31223 31695 30503 30539 30539 31005 30522 31708 30831 30752 30713 30705 90770515 30839 30717 30 52 Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka MPX Mustek Mx Onda Mystral NAD Naiko Narita NEC Neovia Nesa Neufunk Nevir NexxTech Nikkai Nintaus Niro Norcent Nordmende Noriko Nova Nowa Nu Tec Okano Olidata Omni Onix Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orbit Orion Oritron Ormond P amp B Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panasonic Panda peeKTon Philco Philips 31521 30521 30713 31403 30770 31451 3066
238. o a connector other than VCR iPod make the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source to which iPod dock assigned Assign iPod dock I2 amp page 47 14 5 5 ES 5 o TV CABLE Tuner Satellite Receiver Connect the cables to be used Connect the cables to be used TV tuner DBS BS tuner VIDEO TT AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COAXIAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Y PB PR VIDEO mM AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT PB PR 5 5 o WLAN Y SAT TU ANTENNA TRIGGER 0UT 1 ad SELECTABLE 2 DC 12V 250mA MAX MONITOR 5 DVR 1 6 DVR OPTICAL OPTICAL po DIGI zm lias ass F W LN T uU uu 1 D 1 T CBL 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 VCF 2 DVR 3 SAT 4 CD 4 TV CBL 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 vci f 2 D v f OO lt Hp 2 PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR Z 7 o o o o o o o I f Hs a CN pvp HDP TV CBL SAT VCR iPod DVR 1 DVR 2 pares wey wey ES NS WS AZ J 2 lt ES gt m e 9
239. o make a setting to DENON LINK Input source CD DVD HDP IV CBL SAT Default setting Coaxial 4 Coaxial 1 Coaxial 2 Optical 1 Coaxial 3 input source VOR OVA DV82 VAUK Default setting Optical Optical2 Optical Optical 5 This cannot be set for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned None 46 Component Select component video input to assign to this source Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items 1 5 RCA 6 BNC None Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT Default setting 1 2RCA SRCA 4RCA Input source VOR DVR2 VAX Default setting None 5RCA _ This cannot be set for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned Analo Select the analog connector using the CD input Input source Selectable items XLR DGROUND 02 HOT COLD XLR INV ZS GROUND COLD HOT When you assign XLR INV IPod dock you cannot select XLR or NI iPod dock Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source Input source CD DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items Assign None e With the default settings the Control Dock for iPod be used connected to the VCR iPo
240. o previous THX Ultra standards three surround modes have been added the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode 87 THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode new THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay THX Music Mode For the replay of 5 1 multi channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected In this mode new THX processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Di
241. of components in some cases the video signals will not be output e When connecting using an HDMI DVI converter adapter the video signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with the connected cable etc e By default HDMI sound is output from the speaker of the power amp connected to AVP A1HDCI e To output the sound from the TV make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio TV page 32 X The AVP A1HDCI is supported to the feature of HDMI listed below e 30 and 36 bit Deep Color e xvYCC e Auto Lipsync Correction 12 o Connecting the Monitor Connecting the Playback Components e Use a CPPM compatible DVD player to play DVD Audio discs that copyright protected by CPPM e Connect the cables to be used I page 9 Video Conversion Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and e The audio signals output from the HDMI connector sampling Function s outputs and be sure to interconnect correctly frequency bit rate etc may be restricted by the connected With HDMI connections the video and audio signals can be e Video signals are not output properly when using devices thatare To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections DVD Player Oo not HDCP compatible set GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio to IV Conect the cables to Bedsod 2 e Video signals are not outp
242. olution e Input Att e Input Mode e Rename e Source Level Surround Mode IG page 48 50 L STEREO I DIRECT STANDARD DOLBY HEADPHONE When using headphones DOLBY PLIIx DOLBY or DOLBY PL DTS NEO 6 neural _J HOME THX CINEMA _17CH STEREO i WIDE SCREEN 1 SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB 1 CLASSIC CONCERT ai MONO VIDEO GAME aI MATRIX wv I When Screensaver is set to ON the screensaver is activated if no operation is performed for about 3 minutes LJ CD DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX e Play iPod e Video Playback Mode iPod Resolution Assign HDMI Excluding CD Digital i p Scaler Component Analog Progressive Mode Video Select Video Convert Resolution CD only Excluding CD IPod dock Aspect Excluding CD e Input Mode Rename e Source Level e Input Att 1 NET USB e Play Playback Mode e Still Picture e Video Video Select i p Scaler Resolution e Input Mode e Rename e Source Level Auto Setup gt page 26 28 1 Auto Setup e STEP1 Speaker Detection e STEP2 Measurement e STEP3 Calculation e STEP4 Check e STEP5 Store Option e Room EQ Direct Mode e Mic Select Manual Setup page 29 43 L1 Speaker Setup IG page 29 31 e Speaker Configuration e Subwoofer Setup 4 Network Setup IGS page
243. onents 10009 10218 anyo Signature 10047 10093 10030 Prima m ag M Rectiligne 10037 10208 10170 10163 10108 Starlite Silva 10037 10361 10648 10036 10163 10346 10361 10008 10037 10036 10011 S Princeton 10700 Rediffusion 10009 Silva Schneider 10037 11556 we Prinston 11037 FEN 10037 Sanyong 10037 Silvano 10587 Sie 10163 10264 Prinz 10361 Batley 10037 10668 11037 Sanyuan 10093 10009 10817 Silver 10036 10361 10455 10715 Stevison 11982 Prism 10250 10051 HESS 10865 10876 10877 11207 Saville 10060 SilverCrest 11037 Strato 10009 10037 10264 11298 PRESET CODE 8 Strong Studio Experience Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwatt Sunwood Superla Superscan Supersonic Supra Supreme Susumu Sutron SV2000 SVA Svasa Swisstec Sydney Sylvania Symphonic Synco Syntax Sysline T A Tacico Tai Yi Taishan Tandberg Tandy Targa Tashiko Tatung TOL TCM Teac Tec Tech Line Techica Technica 11149 10843 10217 10218 10865 10009 10455 10037 10217 10093 10009 10009 10178 10000 10218 10009 10054 10748 10871 10455 10880 10217 10047 10051 10092 VTA 10000 11904 10000 10178 11144 10037 10447 10178 10009 10009 10109 10093 11371 10092 10217 10054 10051 10011 11191 11556 10706 10714 10154 11755 10712 10455 10170 10009
244. orks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings For details consult a network administrator Wireless LAN settings Make settings for wireless LAN Turn on the AVP A1HDCI s power If no Ethernet cable is connected The mode automatically switches to Wireless To acquire the IP address To enter the IP address manually x m automatically using the DHCP function Display GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Access point settings Connection At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Detail setting To search for the network automatically To set manually set DHCP to OFF and enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway primary DNS and secondary DNS If searching is possible the If searching is not possible access points are displayed Select the access point to Make the SSID setting at be set Manual Detail setting D Input the SSID 2 If there is security select the encryption method 3 Input the encryption key 4 If WEP was selected in step Q select the default key Normally select 1 To not pass through the proxy server When a proxy server is used This setting is required when the network is established via proxy servers At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Network Setup Detail Proxy setting set Proxy to ON and enter the address or domain na
245. ound A and B speakers Q Monitor output indicators These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting When set to Auto Dual the indicators light according to the connection status e Master volume indicator Q AUDYSSEY DYNAMIC EQ indicator This lights when the Dynamic EO is selected Q AUDYSSEY MULTEO XT indicator This lights when the room equalizer is selected D Recording output source indicator This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected D NIGHT indicator This lights when the night mode is selected Multi zone indicators These light when the power for the respective zone 15 turned on MUDES XT AUDYSSEY DYNAMICEQ 77777 777777 B RESTORER indicator This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected D ADVANCED AL24 indicator This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is activated 1 257 page 88 D D LINK indicator This lights when playing using DENON LINK connections Input mode indicators D HDMI indicator This lights when connections playing using HDMI D Decoder indicators These light when the respective decoders are operating D Tuner reception mode indicators These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to TUNER or HD Radio e AUTO This lights when in the auto tuning mode e RDS These light when receiving RDS broadcasts e STEREO In the FM mode this lights when receiving analog stereo broadcasts e TUNED This lights when the
246. ouno Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS Inc compatible with a sampling frequency of 44 1 or 48 kHz and up to 5 1 channels of digital discrete surround sound DTS HD High Resolution Audio DIS HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS DTS ES and DTS 96 24 signals formats compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7 1 channels of discrete digital sound High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound This format is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 channel data DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is DTS Inc s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz 7 1 channels The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master It is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 channel data DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 is a 6 1 channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS ES Matrix 6 1 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 is a 6 1 channel disc
247. output OPTICAL in ZONE2 Copyright protected Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB Rhapsody cannot be output e n ZONEA it is not possible to select XM HD Radio or sources with no digital input signals TUNER PHONO iPod etc Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB Rhapsody can be played as long as they are not copyright protected e When certain digital signals are being input noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors Other Information About Speaker Installation Surround back speakers The THX Surround EX format adds new Surround Back SB channels to the conventional 5 1 channel system This makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional multi surround speakers In addition the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5 1 channel systems Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Change of positioning and acoustic image with 6 1 channel systems Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL In addition to sources recorded In 6 1 channe
248. output ZONE2 ZONE2 S VIDEO OUT ZONE2 OPTICAL OUT ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT ZONE3 VIDEO OUT Monitor R K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K H ct N MAIN ZONE 7 1 channel system Monitor JUL FL SW FR P AV amplifier 8 Power amplifier SE IS Z lt ZONE2 audio n output FL SW output j BEEBE HEHEHE DVD plaver AVP A1HDCI ZONE2 video LOSON Input video a Power amplifier w Output x Remote Gu K control unit lt gt lt gt s lB Power amplifier e When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONES set to Mono ZONE3 audio output mane In this case the ZONE2 ZONE3 monaural output is output from Saca qa the ZONE2 ZONE3 pre out L and R connectors so connect as TII Video cable desired r AU Cio cable e Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3 82 lt ct N SOURCE SELECT lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT gt VOLUME lt ZONE2 ON OFF gt lt ZONE3 ON OFF gt lt ZONE4 ON OFF gt C JAMP ON ZONE2 mode OFF VOLUME MUTE SOURCE SELECT Main remote control unit Multizone a ZONE SELECT indicator 2 ON OFF a Bog Sar TU C TORT
249. pace Video Setting the video source Video Select Switch video input source while listening to audio signal Selectable items DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX 44 doe qno 39g 1 oou Operating from the main unit Press the VIDEO SELECT button then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears X To cancel press the main unit s VIDEO SELECT button then turn the main unit s SOURCE SELECT knob and select SOURCE e t is not possible to select HDMI input signals e When playing HDMI video input signals the analog video signal of another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output e nput sources for which Delete is selected at Source Delete cannot be selected Video Convert Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR Selectable items OFF e For optimum video performance THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to OFF to use video signals pass through system without up conversion Example View video input from a component video on the component video monitor e When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF DVR 1 DVR 2
250. perations a Example Browse Menu Top Menu With the AVP A1HDCI settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on the monitor screen DENON SOURCE SELECT 1 I Selected item The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component J mone name 1080p signal computer s resolution e g VGA are input CD List of subsequent items DVD HDP Gui i LJ List Example of the Display of the GUI at cursor position Selected item Assign 2 Switch to the next item Video Input Mode Rename Mark at a Title Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI We recommend performing such operations from the GUI X Switch the selected item using AV Menus with Illustrations Auto Setup Auto Setup Optimize settinos for speakers in use Operations The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit 1 STEP Speaker Detection 1 Please place the microphone at ear Press the MENU button height at main listening position The GUI menu is displayed This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to X To operate from the main remote control unit be sure to set the which this item belongs remote control unit to the AMP mode Config 9 1 SW 1SP Pre out Assign Press the V gt button to select the menu to be s
251. product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Attachments Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards Water and Moisture Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and the like Accessories Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand tripod bracket or table The product may fall causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer s instructions and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer e A product and cart combination should be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and NIS uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart A combination to overturn Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating and these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by pla
252. r countries Check the HD Radio Reception Information Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod 8572 See the Control Dock for iPod s operating instructions Press STATUS while an HD Radio broadcast is being Assign the Control Dock for iPod s input received i E n Source Select input source Assign The current reception information is shown on the display eut iPod dock eee z D Normal 2 Frequency Signal strength mode to select the input source assigned in step 1 2 3 Long station name Program and Program type above 4 Title name Artist name 5 Album name Genre name If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast while HD and text is displayed the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode the reception frequency is displayed Because of this the HD indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable DENON OK to disconnect iPod screen X f the screens above are not displayed the iPod may not be properly connected Try connecting again L Default settings GUI Source Select input source Play 1 page 44 Tuner presets A1 A8 875 879 89 1 93 3 979 98 1 98 9 100 1 MHz 101 9 7 102 7 7 1079 7 90 1 7 90 1 f 90 1 7 90 1 90 1 B1 B8 MHz C1 C8 530 600 930 1000 1120 1210 1400 1710 kHz To operate using the main remote
253. raction with the room THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually e Sometimes due to interaction with the room you may notice irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main speakers If this happens THX recommends setting them manually e Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small 80 Hz If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover Select Retry to make the measurements again 01059 Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections Option Select settings for room EQ mic etc Room EQ Select room EO setting method Selectable items Assign Direct Mode Select room EO use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode Selectable items ON Mic Select Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic The microphone connected to V AUX Lch is used Selectable items Mic V AUX L Only professionally certified installer should ever connect professionally calibrated microphone to the V AUX L input on the front panel Parameter Check Check auto setup measurement results F This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed Selectable items Spkr Config Check Distance Check Ch Level Check Crossover Check EQCheck Restore I The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by Mult
254. recorded in XM HD Surround I page 88 d Select the Cinema Music Game and Pro Logic modes at GUI menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters Mode I page 50 48 Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc Selectable items STANDARD This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing surround sound The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode inputsigni DOLBY DIGITAL other than 2ch Dolby DOLBY DIGITAL Digital EX Source DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD DTS SURROUND N DTS PLIIx CINEMA e DTS PLIIx MUSIC _ DTS NEO 6 DTS ud DTS ES MTRX6 1 1 Surround DTS ES DSCRT6 1 2 Source DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 3 DTS HD High A T V DTS HD Master Audio 1 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Matrix 6 1 and the AVP A1HDCI s AFDM setting is set to ON 2 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Discrete 6 1 3 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS 96 24 For details see page 91 92 PCM multi ch DSD multi ch 49 Dolby Headphone The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack while in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND mode Selectable items DOLBY HEADPHONE
255. rete digital audio format inserting a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS NEO 6 Surround DTS NEO 6 is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6 1 channel surround playback with 2 channel sources It includes DTS NEO 6 CINEMA suited for playing movies and DTS NEO 6 MUSIC suited for playing music DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5 1 channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD Video Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos Symbol DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2007 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved Home THX Cinema Surround THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world renowned film production company Lucasfilm Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theaters and in your home theater as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters wit
256. rformance this indicates a need for service Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition Wall or Ceiling Mounting The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other products including amplifiers that produce heat FCC Information For US customers COMPLIANCE INFORMATION Product Name AV Surround Pre Amplifier Model Number AVP A1HDCI This product contains FCC ID BV2 MPGBRO052 This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Denon Electronics USA LLC 100 Corporate Drive Mahwah NJ 07430 2041 Tel 201 762 6500 Main IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product when installed as indicated in the
257. ries be sure to do so in the proper direction following the and marks in the battery compartment e o prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid e Do not use a new battery together with an old one e Do not use two different types of batteries e Do not attempt to charge dry batteries e Do not short circuit disassemble heat or dispose of batteries in flames e f the battery fluid should leak carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries e Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods e When replacing the batteries have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it Approx 7 RC 1067 The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light Part Names and Functions For buttons not explained here see the page indicated in parentheses Front Panel QUICK SELECT m m m m m um V9 Power operation button ON STANDBY 56 Power indicator M
258. rnal AM antenna is used do not disconnect the AM loop antenna e Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel Installation hole Mount on wall etc 20 e 5 5 o Network Audio Wired LAN eke Sey Internet LAN port Ethernet connector Wireless LAN ee Sey COAXIAL Internet O Rodantenna supplied DENON LINK m Ard COAXIAL OPTICAL Required system 1 Broadband Internet connection A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to use the AVP A1HDCI s Internet radio function and firmware update i Modem Thisisadevicethatis connected to the broadband line to communicate with the Internet Some are integrated with the router 2 Router e When using the AVP A1HDCI we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions Built in DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN Built in 100BASE TX switch When connecting multiple devices we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater e When using with a wireless LAN prepare a broadband router with built in access point _ Ethernet cable CAT 5 or greater recomm
259. rol Unit is Used ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room When this is done the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP All the multi zone indicators light Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes Select the multi zone to be set The selected multi zone indicator lights DTo set to MAIN ZONE Press REPEAT Nevers o o Press RANDOM Jj ese to ZONES Press USB set to ZONEA Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES MENU RANDOM Te ALL MUSIC REPEAT 9 0 FAVORITES USB Switching Zones Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit Press ZONE SELECT The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off To Cancel Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Press ZONE SELECT All the multi zone indicators light
260. roller RC 7000CI sold separately and RF Remote Receiver RC 7001 RCI sold separately two way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible The AVP A1HDCI s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller s display For details refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices e When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller and RF Remote Receiver make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup 2Way Remote Used I 41 e When using the 2 way remote control unit connect to the Port 1 RS 232C connector e f GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup 2Way Remote is set to Used you cannot use port 1 of the RS 232C connector for the external controller Trigger output jacks The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input Jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVP A1HDCI For details see GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Trigger Out 17 Trigger Out 27 Trigger Out 3 or Trigger Out 4 IE page 41 e Output level 250 mA 12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device J TUNER AM m a WAN Y SATTU m ss ANTENNA 2 M XM Mm IN DC 12V 250m MAX H 1 go 2 HDP 3 SAT 4 VC DM 3 ASSIGNABLE DN ge LINK COAXIAL DIGITAL ES D
261. rom touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal Overloading Do not overload wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Damage Requiring Service Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged b If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product c If the product has been exposed to rain or water d If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation e If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way and f When the product exhibits a distinct change in pe
262. roved bass balance BGC can be selected by choosing THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Yes from the Boundary Gain Compensation section of the THX Audio setup menu THX and Re EQ THX Timbre Matching THX Adaptive Decorrelation and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved THX Surround EX In 1999 anew surround system was launched simultaneously with the release of the movie Star Wars Episode 1 Dolby Digital Surround EX Is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel sound The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound effects that seem to pass right over the listener s head This system was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories fusing THX s idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform 360 degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories matrix encoding technology Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing system Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and the new surround back SB channel was added to achieve improvements over the conventional 5 1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the rear the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters thereby enabling various types of surround sound
263. s an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in every seat Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area but also performs a fully automated surround system setup For a detailed description see page 26 Audyssey Dynamic EO T Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics Dynamic EQ selects the best possible frequency response and surround levels moment by moment as volume is changed The result is bass response tonal balance and surround impression that remain constant despite changes in volume This is the first technology to combine information from incoming source levels with actual output sound levels in the room a pre requisite for delivering a loudness correction solution Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well balanced sound for every listener at any volume level AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT DYNAMIC EQ license from Audyssey Laboratories U S and foreign patents pending Audyssey MultEQ XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Dynamic EQ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Manufactured under For more information visit www audyssey com HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital HDCD is an encoding decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occ
264. s suited for the equipment you are connecting With some types of connections certain settings must be made Coaxial digital connections Component video connections o on the AVP A1HDCI For details refer to the instructions for the o lt D n P Green Y respective connection items below Orange NOTE Coaxial digital 75 Q ohms pin plug cable Blue PB CB l Red PR CR e Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been Optical digital connections completed Component video cable e When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of a the other components Optical cable Green u 0 e sure to connect the left and right channels properly left with left o Blue right with right BNC digital connections Red z e Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables Doin s E 7 7 j I i BNC 75 O ohms cable so can result in humming or noise BNC 75 O ohms cable S Video connections Analog connections XLR I bc Balanced cable S Video cable Analog connections stereo RCA Video connections White or Yellow D I Red Key 75 O ohms pin plug video cable Stereo pin plug cable Audio and video cables Analog connections monaural for subwoofer Black D 1 Pin plug cable HDMI connections 19 pin HDMI cable DENON LINK connections Signal direction DENON
265. set channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 1 8 Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 1 8 Direct channel search 1 8 1 8 0 9 SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block Poe Switch memory block Signal transmission indicator C JAMP M28 7 JT RET MODE SELECTOR JT 3 BiPod NUMBER RC SETUP Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates Press AMP to set the main remote control unit to the AMP mode Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Refer to the table at the right and use NUMBER to input the 5 digit number corresponding to the remote ID to be changed The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press TU iPod or NET DTU to select the mode to be set 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all modes Analog TUNER Remote ID MODE SELECTOR NET DTU Pod 1 Default 52863 72815 e When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVP A1HDCI s IG page 41 e When changing the AMP mode s remote ID also change the TUNER iPod and NET DTU remote ID at the same time Set the remote ID of an analog
266. set using the same procedure as for FM AM stations I page 57 58 Presetting Radio Stations Preset Memory and Listening to Preset Stations In addition with HD Radio technology multicasts can also be preset e The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI Tuner I page 40 iPod Playback The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for iPod ASD 1R sold separately The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus Made for iPod X The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted HD1 is Basic Operation automatically selected after about 20 seconds 1 Make the necessary preparations Selecting Audio Programs An HD Radio broadcast includes up to 8 audio programs HD1 to HD8 and Analog The different audio programs also have data programs Press SEARCH or A V to select the audio program If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs HD1 is indicated on the display If it only has one audio program HD Is Indicated iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and othe
267. sh with the screen surface as possible Surround speakers Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm The table below shows typical speaker configuration for the AVP A1HDCI SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK TI X Ihe AVP A1HDCI can be connected to a maximum of 3 subwoofers Connecting to the Power Amp e Connect the AVP A1HDCI pre out terminal to the power amp sold separately e AVP A1HDCI has a RCA pre out terminal and XLR pre out terminal Connect accordingly with the power amp you want to use e he polarity of the XLR pre out terminal can be switched using GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup XLR Out Polarity I page 39 e Connect the speakers to the power amp e Refer to the owner s manual of each piece of equipment when making connections POA A1HDCI Connection and Operation e When connecting the AVP A1HDCI to the power amp POA A1HDCI with a control link cable included with the POA A1HDCI you can perform the followin
268. signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times All the settings are restored to their defaults 78 JJ e o O gt et 2 A Sub Remote Control Unit Operations 2 e The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used 0 buttons so it can be used for simple remote control unit 3 operations e The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi zone so o you can use it to control the AVP A1HDCI from other rooms S e The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit zj Switching the input source o Adjusting the volume Tuner AM FM XM HD Radio and iPod operations NET USB direct play GUI menu and ZONE2 on screen display operations one power on off e t is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier Nc ZONE SELECT ZONE OFF gt 5 ZONE ON CHANNEL VOLUME MUTE 5 SHIFT 7 MENU 1 cT ENTERI A V 40 18 RETURN SEARCH 5 a a gt gt I Il 5 10 QTE TUNING A V REPEAT ALL MUSIC FAVORITES RANDOM USB ALL MUSIC REPEAT RANDOM USB FAVORITES DIRECT PLAY 79 Functions of Buttons by Component DVD HDP TV CBL DVR 1 DVR 2 VCR Device operated TUNER DTU V AUX SAT CD PHONO AM FM HD Radio M Z2 2 mM 2 mM 3 wm Zone
269. sotrope rayonn e quivalente p i r e ne soit pas sup rieure au niveau requis pour l obtention d une communication satisfaisante L NOTE ON USE OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L UTILISATION Keep the unit free from moisture water and dust Prot ger l appareil contre l humidit l eau et la poussi re Avoid high temperatures Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack e Eviter des temp ratures lev es Tenir compte d une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l installation sur une tag re e Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time e D brancher le cordon d alimentation lorsque l appareil n est pas utilis pendant de longues p riodes Handle the power cord carefully Hold the plug when unplugging the cord Manipuler le cordon d alimentation avec pr caution Tenir la prise lors du d branchement du cordon For apparatuses with ventilation holes e Do not obstruct the ventilation holes e Ne pas obstruer les trous d a ration Do not let foreign objects into the unit Ne pas laisser des objets trangers dans l appareil e Do not let insecticides benzene and thinner come in contact with the unit e Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides du benz ne et un diluant avec l appareil Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way Ne jamais d monter ou modifier l appareil d une mani re ou d une autre Contents ACGOS
270. ssover frequency and optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer Audyssey MultEQ XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area Before starting connect and position all your speakers Once started MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker If an error message appears during the measurements check Error Messages I 28 take the advised action then start the measurements again Configuration The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time here Selectable items 9 1 1 1 5 1 9 2 1 2 i 5 2 3 3 3 9 3 7 3 5 3 1 This can be set when Subwoofer is set 1SP 2 This can be set when Subwoofer is set to 2SP L R or 2SP MIX 3 This can be set when Subwoofer is set to 3SP L R LFE or 3SP MIX Setting the correct configuration reduce the time required to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not have to look for speakers that are not connected Subwoofer The configuration of the measuring subwoofer can be selected beforehand Selectable items 2SP L R 2SP MIX 3SP L R LFE 3SP MIX 27 Pre out Assign Change the pre out assignment Selectable items Free Assign XLR Out Polarity Set to switch the XLR pre out terminal polarity Selectable items XLR INV d Set each channel STEP1 Speaker Detection he speaker connection an
271. standby mode When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling either press POWER to turn off the power or unplug the power cord from the power outlet Operations During Playback Adjusting the Master Volume Either turn MASTER VOLUME or press MASTER VOLUME MUTE r E un a 1 Od 1 pese DVD HDI P gt woe j 5 7g _ _ i 1 V AUX F 1 I sail SELECT About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Turning Off the Sound Temporarily Muting Press MUTE cancel press MUTE again Muting also be canceled by adjusting the master volume Listening with Headphones Plug the headphones into lt PHONES gt The sound from the pre out connectors is automatically cut Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones Playing Video and Audio Equipment Basic Operation 1 Prepare the equipment the DVD CD or other software in the player IS See the operating instructions of the respective devices 2 To play a video device switch the monitor input See the monitor s operating instructions To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode e page 73 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Use SOURCE SELECT to s
272. sult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio TV technician for help IC Information For Canadian customers PRODUCT This product contains IC 6963A MPGBR052 This product complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 APPAREIL Cet appareil contiens IC 6963A MPGBR052 Cet appareil est conforme la norme CNR 210 du Canada L utilisation de ce dispositif est autoris e seulement aux deux conditions suivantes 1 il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre pr t accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique recu m me si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CAUTION To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power e i r p is not more than that permitted for successful communication ATTENTION Afin de r duire le risque d interf rence aux autres utilisateurs il faut choisir le type d antenne et son gain de facon ce que la puissance i
273. t inserted in the proper direction as indicated by the polarity marks in the battery compartment e he set s remote control sensor Is exposed to strong light direct sunlight inverter type fluorescent bulb light etc e The remote ID of the main unit and remote control unit do not match e Replace with new batteries e Operate within the specified range e Hemove the obstacle e nsert the batteries in the proper direction following the polarity marks in the battery compartment e Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light e Set the same remote IDs for the main unit and remote control unit 41 76 81 Audio Symptom No sound 15 produced from center speaker No sound Is produced from surround speakers No sound 15 produced from surround back speaker No sound 15 produced from subwoofer No test tones are produced when main remote control unit s TEST button is pressed DTS sound is not output HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers eYou are playing a monaural source TV AM radio broadcast etc in the STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround or HOME THX CINEMA mode e The surround mode is set to STEREO DIRECT ot PURE DIRECT e Surround back speaker setting is set to None e Surround mode not set to a mode for 6 1 or 7 1 channel playback e Subwoofer s power not turned on e
274. tandard Playback ee 48 Surround Playback Of 2 ehannel SOUPCOS 48 Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc 49 Dolby Headphone 49 DSP Simulation Playback D ERR TT ET 49 Stereo Playback Peres MPH MC EL 49 Direct Playback doc eive uude ME T VI EE EET e EE E MC 50 Playback in the PURE DIRECT Veer nn soe ers 50 Parameter Audio a 52 2225 I E 50 Surround Parameters mn E0352 Tone VO AR a CR 52 53 Room EQ eI a a DEI 53 El Dynamic jO nasa sam sa 53 REST ORE exu sen akg aan ama eels 53 BW atid ote n 53 Audio Delay MEME EE 54 Picture Adjust 5A 54 Brightness A ete uae 54 Chrotra LeWwel sscxesexss usu 2 sia exea rx han EUER CX DOES Ea xS ia 54 n ASO OAA OUIA dde uma oe 54 ls sce E sss 54 n Enhancer LL eee e ee e a 54 Sharpness E ET 54 Information Gratis nn E R 54 MAINZ ON E EA 54 pia SEE ws walas 54 Audio Input Signal m TACT M 55 FHDMIInformatiof iret ore n yeh eh ke mx iR Rp emn an as 55 Signal Information 55 Monitori sores 2
275. tents For details see the operating instructions of your server software e Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the file to be displayed Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites Files can be preset registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations e Presettings are erased by overwriting them e When the operation described below is performed the media server s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files When you quit the media server and then restart it When music files are deleted or added on the media server e When using an ESCIENT server place ESCIENT before the server name Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transfer Protocol standards can be played on the AVP A1HDCI Basic Operation Make the necessary preparations e Set the USB port to be used GUI Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select 1257 page 47 e Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port 2 Use A V to select USB then press ENTER or P Use A V to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or Use A V to select the file then press ENTER or b Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 e default
276. tions can be selected directly While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing press MEMO 2 Use A V to select Preset then press ENTER Press A G then press 1 8 to select the desired preset number The Internet radio station is now preset If registered at a number that has already been preset the previously registered setting is cleared L1 Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations Press A G then press 1 8 The AVP A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily Press MEMO while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing 2 Use A V to select Favorites then press ENTER Press lt to select Yes The Internet radio station is registered If you do not want to register it press P yoeqheld LJ Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites Use A V to select Favorites then press ENTER or Use AV to select the Internet radio station then press ENTER or b The AVP A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins 1 Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites Use A V to select Favorites then press ENTER or P Use A V to select the Internet radio station you want to clear then press MEMO Press lt to select Delete
277. to play and set input source do not match e Master volume is turned too low e Mute mode is set e Headphones are connected eNo digital signals are being input e The connectors to which the digital inputs are assigned and the settable input modes do not match e The Dimmer setting is set to OFF e The PURE DIRECT mode is set e DVD player s digital audio output setting Is not proper eCheck that the power plug is securely inserted into the AVP A1HDCI s AC inlet and the wall power outlet e Check the connections e Select an source e Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level e Cancel the mute mode e Disconnect the headphones e Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been made e Set the input mode appropriate input e Set to something other than OPES e Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT mode e Check the DVD players audio output setting For details read the DVD players operating instructions Symptom e Set is damaged Power turns off suddenly and power indicator flashes red Remote Control Unit Symptom Cause e Turn off the power and contact a DENON service center Countermeasure Set does not work e Batteries are worn properly when remote control unit operated e You are operating outside of the specified range e Obstacle between main unit and remote control unit e he batteries are no
278. udio Sonic Frontiers Sony Sugden Sylvania TAG McLaren Tandy Tascam 40000 40032 40087 40179 40420 40468 40420 40393 40157 40000 40721 40157 40157 40868 40101 40000 40032 40037 40087 40179 40393 40420 40468 40393 40029 40303 40388 40752 40420 40029 40157 40032 40101 40468 40157 40420 40157 40157 40157 40029 40157 40000 40032 40179 40420 40468 40032 40053 40179 40420 40468 40000 40032 40087 40179 40420 40468 40157 40157 40420 40157 40420 40420 40157 40000 40000 40157 40000 40087 40179 40157 40179 40037 40157 40036 40157 40157 40490 40000 40100 41364 40185 40157 40157 40157 40032 40393 40420 gt lt CD Recorder NV ao Tape Deck A ono rR lt Teac Technics Techwood Thomson Thorens Thule Audio Tokai Universum Victor Wadia Wards Yamaha Yorx Denon JVC RCA Sony Teac Thomson Aiwa Akai Arcam Audiolab Carver Denon Fisher Garrard Genexxa GoldStar Grundig Harman Kardon Inke JVC Kenwood LG Luxman Magnavox Marantz Memorex Mitsubishi Myryad Onkyo Optimus Orion 40490 40393 40420 40029 40303 40303 40053 40157 40157 40420 40157 40053 40072 40393 40000 40032 40157 40053 40087 40179 40490 40868 40032 40036 40000 40766 42868 40072 40053 40420 40000 40100 41364 40420 40053 20029 20197 20200 2131
279. ul Buljooysajqnoly Symptom iPod cannot be played e The input source assigned to iPod dock is not selected e Cable is not properly connected e Control Dock for iPod s AC adapter is not connected to power outlet Switch to the input source assigned at iPod dock e Reconnect e Plug the Control Dock for iPod s AC adapter into a power outlet NET USB Rhapsody When a USB memory device Is connected USB is not displayed on the GUI menu Files on a USB memory device cannot be played The file names are not displayed properly etc 101 e The set cannot recognize a USB memory device eA USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards is connected e The set port and the connected port do not match eA USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected e USB memory device is connected via USB hub e USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32 e USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions eFiles are stored in compatible format e You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected e Characters that cannot be displayed are used e Check the connection e Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MIP standards e Connect to the port set at USB Select e This is nota malfunction DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operat
280. ul an error message identical to those in Firmware Update will appear on the display Notes concerning use of Firmware Update and Add New Feature e n order to use these functions you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection For details see pages 35 37 e Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed e Normally there is no need to use this function aside from the cases described below Firmware Update In the case of applying the latest firmware updates free Add New Feature In the case of future upgrades to add new functions to the receiver payment required Information regarding the Firmware Update function and Add New Feature will be announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are defined e Even with a broadband connection to the Internet approximately 1 hour is required for the updating upgrading procedure to be completed Once updating upgrading starts normal operations on the AVP A1HDCI cannot be performed until updating upgrading is completed Furthermore updating upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters etc set for the AVP A1HDCI e When updating upgrading the firmware we recommend using wired connections Ethernet cable 42 om unior a TE lt uee VILIC J Ug o n 013002 uo7 1
281. units 1st unit 1 2nd unit 2 X Refer to the POA A1HDCI owner s manual for details Switch the AVP A1HDCI and POA A1HDCI power on DVD Audio disc using HDMI DVI connections both the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection system called HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identification of the devices The AVP A1HDCI is HDCP compatible For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using refer to its operating instructions Depending on the number of POA A1HDCI units to Tn DENON LINK BNC COAXIAL be connected set GUI menu Option Setup POA t t W Setting POA LINK to either ON Single or w i ON Dual 128 page 39 een JO oe ON Dual E page 39 OO Use GUI menu Option Setup POA Setting R LINK Check to check the connection 190000009 fex When connecting n boii DVI converter cable 1000000000 DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR iPod DVR 1 DVR e HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format When connecting to a monitor etc equipped with a DVI D connector connection is possible using an HDMI DVI converter cable but depending on the combination
282. up Mode is set to DSP IG page 33 Subwoofer Att Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT IN input Selectable items ON Set this to ON if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD Subwoofer Turn subwoofer output on and off Selectable items ON OFF Default Resets the settings to the default values A Tone Adjust the tonal quality of the sound Tone Defeat Turn tone adjustments off Selectable items ON OFF The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT PURE DIRECT HOME THX CINEMA mode Bass Adjust bass for all channels together Variable range 6dB 6dB Treble Adjust treble for all channels together Variable range 6dB 6dB I Bass and Treble can be set when Tone Defeat is set to OFF Front Adjust each front channel tone Selectable items Bass Treble Variable range 6dB 6dB Center Adjust each center channel tone Selectable items Bass Treble Variable range 6dB 6dB Surround Adjust each surround channel tone Bass Treble 6dB 6dB Selectable items Variable range Surround Back Adjust each surround back channel tone Bass Treble 6dB 6dB Selectable items Variable range 52 Subwoofer Adjust each subwoofer channel tone Bass 6dB 6dB Selectable items Variable range e This can
283. urs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs automatically to select the optimum digital processing identified HocD HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital and Microsoft are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Inc in the United States and or other countries HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation Inc This product is covered by one or more of the following In the USA 5 479 168 5 638 074 5 640 161 5 808 574 5 838 274 5 854 600 5 864 311 5 872 531 and in Australia 669114 Other patents pending DENON LINK DENON LINK is a unique digital balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON It offers high speed high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz 24 bit 2 channel digital signals of DVD Audio discs PCM multi channel signals etc Full spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition Advanced AL24 Processing Multi channel Equipped with Advanced AL24 Processing time axis reg
284. usable channels overlap Satellite Radio e Confirm the XM Mini Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini Tuner dock cable is connected to the AVP A1HDCI CHECK TUNER epee in the XM mode CHECK ANTENNA is displayed in the XM mode eThe XM MinriTuner is not installed or not fully seated in the XM Mini Tuner Dock or the XM Mini Tuner dock is not connected to the AVP A1HDCI e he XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable is damaged e Match the network settings with the AVP A1HDCI s settings e Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN s access point remove obstacles and otherwise improve visibility then try reconnecting Also install away from microwave ovens and the access points of other networks e Set the access point s channel settings away from the channels used for other networks Alternatively connect using a network cable e Set the access point s channel settings away from the channels used for other networks Alternatively connect using a network cable eCheck that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable for damage Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged 102 r 5 z e 5 Satellite Radio Symptom 59 60 LOADING is displayed in the XM mode NO SIGNAL
285. ut if the input video signals do not match Iker page 32 e With HDMI connections the video and audio signals can be transferred B the monitor s resolution In this case switch the DVD player s Monitor with a single cable resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible VIDEO DVD player VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COAXIAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT OUT e f the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio SE jc setting Iz amp page 32 is set to Amp the sound may be PB PR interrupted when the monitor s power is turned off OOO e Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated a certified HDMI product for connection to the HDMI connector Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated a non HDMI certified product e f the monitor or DVD player does not support Deep Color Deep Color signal transfer is not possible e f the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC xvYCC signal transfer is not possible elf the monitor does not support Auto Lipsync Correction function this function will not work QU e The AVP A1HDCI is compatible with the HDMI s CEC Consumer Electronics Control function Please note the following It may not work depending on the device it is connected to and PB PR ooo 3 SAT
286. ved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II matrix decoding technology Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7 1 channels There are 3 modes Music suited for playing music Cinema suited for playing movies and Game which is optimized for playing games Dolby Headphone This is a three dimensional sound technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd of Australia for achieving surround sound using regular headphones Previously when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long periods of time Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a room and places the sound at the front or the sides outside the head to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters This technology is mainly for multichannel audio video equipment with Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and works with a high performance digital signal processing DSP chip Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel sources but also for stereo programs On the AVP A1HDCI it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder X Sources recorded in Dolby Surround Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks Dolby Surround support mark DIT petev surr
287. version function are automatically converted and output I page 9 e o the monitor output of ZONES video signals input from the S video terminal or video terminal is output IP page 9 e he ZONE2 ZONE3 video out is only for ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE2 ZONES Power Power amplifier Monitor Monitor amplifier VIDEO VIDEO IN AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO IN IN IN AUDIO WLAN SAT TU M 2 HDP 1 vb 3 5AT Infrared sensor Infrared retransmitter 1 e For the audio output use high quality pin plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced e For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices refer to the respective devices operating instructions e To conduct multi zone playback see Multi Zone Connections and Operations I page 82 83 ZONE2 or ZONE4 Optical Connections The AVP A1HDCI is equipped with Optical output connectors for ZONE2 and ZONEA If a bit stream amp Is rigged up these zones can also be used to enjoy home theater AV amplifier ZONE2 AUDIO AV amplifier ZONE4 AUDIO OPTICAL IN OPTICAL IN OPTICAL 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 W SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A MAX AC OU
288. ves the positioning of the sound at the rear Because of this the surround left and right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back As shown on the diagram above in a movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners creating an acoustic image as if the sound were floating in space To achieve these effects we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than with conventional surround systems Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5 1 channel sources in the THX Surround EX mode Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode Examples of speaker layouts Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them 1 For THX surround EX systems Using surround back speakers D When mainly playing movies Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2 way speakers Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer Surround back Speaker speaker Front speaker d E 240 7 60 90 Point slightly downwards Surround Surround Surround back speakers As seen from the side As seen from above 84 A E 5 l
289. woofer Setup is 1SP 2SP L R or 2SP MIX The transducer signal is outputted from SW3 Level Variable range 12dB OdB 12dB Set the transducer level OFF Turn the transducer output off When you adjust Level the adjusted value is set for all surround modes To adjust the level for individual surround modes use Channel Level I page 72 LPF Set the upper limit of the low frequency output to the transducer Selectable items 40Hz 60Hz 90Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz Digital Out Set usage of OPT4 OUT Selectable items ZONE4 Select Rec Select NOTE The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to Rec Select Remote ID Set remote control ID Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver Selectable items 4 2 3 4 e When changing the remote ID also change the AMP iPod TU and NET DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time IS page 76 e When changing the remote ID also change the sub remote control unit at the same time IGS page 81 2Way Remote Set when using the 2 way remote control unit Selectable items Used When using 2 way remote control unit RC 7000CI and RC 7001 RCI sold separately set this to Used e When using the 2 way remote control unit connect to the Port 1 RS 232C connector e f GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup
290. ximum volume Selectable items OFF 20dB 10dB 04 D This can be set when Volume Level is set to Variable Power On Level Option Setup Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned l Make various other settings on Selectable items Last dB 70dB 18dB I This can be set when Volume Level is set to Variable Menu tree Manual Setup Option Setup Pre out Assign XLR Out Polarity POA Setting Volume Control Source Delete IE Digital Out Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on Selectable items Full 40dB 20dB Video Convert ZONE2 only Automatically convert video input signal to ZONE2 monitor output format Input source Selectable items OFF OSD Set ZONE2 monitor as onscreen display Zone Selectable items Display only ZONE2 operations ZONE2 ZONE3 Display ZONE2 and ZONES operations On screen display appears only on the ZONE2 monitor It does not appear on the ZONES monitor 38 powers Bunjer SUOIJDBUUND yoeqAeid J J Oo13uo HINA Orjeuuoju 9uoZ l Uu Buinoous jlqnoul El Pre out Assign XLR Out Polarity Change the pre out assignment Set to switch the XLR pre out terminal polarity SRA SR SR
291. ystem Videotechnic Videoton Vidikron Vidtech Viewpia Viewsonic Viking Viore Vision Vizio Vortec Voxson Waltham Wards Warumaia Watson Watt Radio Waycon Wega Wegavox Weipai Welltech Weltblick Welton Weltstar Westinghouse Wharfedale White Westinghouse Windsor Windy Sam Winte World 10037 10864 10865 10880 10030 10037 11163 10008 10250 10653 10508 10218 10217 10009 10037 10163 10054 10178 10876 10857 11578 10060 11207 10037 10864 11758 10037 10178 10037 10443 10047 10000 10236 10030 11147 10037 10374 10009 10394 10163 10156 10036 10009 10009 10714 10217 10178 11037 10000 11282 10037 10451 10623 10668 10556 10714 10451 10163 10885 218 10217 10037 10053 10218 10374 10036 10864 11627 10217 10885 10037 10109 10668 10054 10156 10180 10166 10866 10035 10661 10037 10668 10037 10451 11577 10556 10236 10889 11037 10236 117 10668 11037 10036 10650 10885 11330 11755 10264 11755 11756 10163 10418 10217 10418 11037 10017 10154 10051 10093 10060 10178 11347 11156 10195 10001 10163 10218 10714 11037 10885 10889 10860 11556 10463 10037 11909 10463 10180 World of Vision Worldview X View Xenius Xi

Denon POA-A1HDCI User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents